2012 chevy malibu owner's manual baltimore, maryland

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-29

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-14Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-27Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-45

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82

jrubino

Stamp


2012 Chevrolet Malibu Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-13

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem,MALIBU, and the MALIBU Emblemare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438de langue françaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20912743 B Second Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control (ESC)

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices(Auxiliary Input orUSB Port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑9.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

E. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

F. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

G. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

H. Driver Compartment Storage.See Front Storage on page 4‑2.

I. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

J. Cruise Control on page 9‑31.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22.

K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑14.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 (Out of View).

M. Horn on page 5‑3.

N. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 (If Equipped).

O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑15.

P. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5 (IfEquipped) .

Q. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

R. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑22.

S. Front Storage on page 4‑2.

Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

T. Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24.

U. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.


1-4 In Brief

Press K to unlock the driver door.Press again within five seconds tounlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29 foradditional information.

Press and holdV forapproximately one second toopen the trunk.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.


In Brief 1-5

Door Locks

Manual Locks

From inside the vehicle move themanual lock control to unlock or locka door.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

For more information, see:. Door Locks on page 2‑7.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

Trunk ReleaseTo open the trunk from the outside,press the trunk release button onthe RKE transmitter.

Remote Trunk Release

Press the button located on thedriver door near the map pocket toopen the trunk.

Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk on the trunklatch. This handle glows followingexposure to light. Pull the releasehandle up to open the trunk from theinside.

See Trunk on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.


1-6 In Brief

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the armrest on thedriver's door. In addition, there is aswitch on each passenger door.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

Express-Down Window

The driver window has anexpress-down feature. This switch islabeled AUTO. Press the front allthe way down and release, toautomatically lower.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull the front of the switchmomentarily. To raise the window,pull and hold the front of the switch.

Express-Up Window

On windows with this feature, pullthe switch up to the second positionand release the switch to activatethe express-up feature. To stop thewindow as it is going up, pull up orpress down briefly on the switchagain.

See Power Windows on page 2‑16.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

Seat Position

To adjust the seat position:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.


In Brief 1-7

Height Adjustment

If available, press and hold the topor bottom of the switch to raise orlower the seat. Release the switchwhen the desired height is reached.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Seatback Adjustment

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


See “Manual Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑4.


1-8 In Brief

Power Seats

Seat Position

To adjust a power seat, if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Seatback Adjustment

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”under Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑4.

Lumbar Adjustment

A. Increase Lumbar SupportControl

B. Decrease Lumbar SupportControl

If available, press the front (A) orrear (B) of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the desired level ofsupport is reached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4.


In Brief 1-9

Second Row SeatsWith this feature, either side of theseatback can be folded down formore cargo space. Before folding aseatback, make sure the front seatis not reclined. If it is, the rearseatback will not fold down allthe way.

To lower the rear seatback, pull upon the seatback strap while foldingthe seatback down. This allowsaccess to the trunk. To raise therear seatback pull the seatback upand make sure it latches.

Push and pull on the seatback to besure it is locked in position. Makesure that the safety belts areproperly stowed over the seatbackin all three positions.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑7 formore information.

Heated Seats

If available, press the top of theswitch to turn the heat feature on tothe high heat setting. The indicatorlight “2” will be lit.

Press the top of the switch again togo to the low heat setting. Theindicator light “1” will be lit.

Press the bottom of the switch toturn the feature off.

The heated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned off.

For more information, see HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑6.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.


1-10 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑8.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑10.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑11.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑38.

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and seat‐mounted side impact airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbagis affected by this.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24 for important information.


In Brief 1-11

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Move the selector switch locatedbelow the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Interior Mirror

Hold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview of behind your vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind. Push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑14.

Vehicles with an automatic dimmingrearview mirror will automaticallyreduce the glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behind.This feature comes on each timethe vehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimmingfeature off or on, press andhold O for approximatelysix seconds or until the indicatorlight turns off or on.

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering wheel column.


1-12 In Brief

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

To turn the dome lamps onmanually, turn the instrument panelbrightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column, clockwise to thefarthest position. The dome lampswill remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

The front reading lamps are locatedin the front overhead console. Therear reading lamps are near thedome lamp overhead near the rearpassenger seats.

For vehicles with front and/or rearreading lamps, press the lens toturn the lamp on and off, while thedoors are closed. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For more information on interiorlighting, see:. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Entry/Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.. Parade Dimming on page 6‑6.

Exterior Lighting

P : Briefly turn to this position tomanually turn the automatic lampcontrol off or on.

In Canada, this position only workswhen a vehicle is in the P (Park)position. When the vehicle is putinto D (Drive) the lights come on.

AUTO: Automatically turns on theDaytime Running Lamps duringdaytime, and the headlamps,parking lamps, and taillamps atnight.

; : Manual operation of theparking lamps and taillamps.

2 : Manual operation of theheadlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.


In Brief 1-13

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Delayed Headlamps on

page 6‑4.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever islocated on the right side of thesteering column.

9 : Turns the wipers off.

3 : For intermittent or speedsensitive operation. While in thisposition, turn thex band up ordown to vary frequency.

The amount of delay time variesbetween wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speedof the vehicle. As vehicle speed isincreased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases ordecreases.

6 : Slow wipes.

1 : Fast wipes.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

Windshield Washer: Press thebutton at the end of the lever untilthe washers begin.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


1-14 In Brief

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Recirculation

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).


In Brief 1-15

Automatic Climate Control System (If Equipped)

A. Fan Control

B. Air Conditioning

C. Air Recirculation

D. Outside Air

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Display

H. Temperature Control

See Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑5 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

This position allows you to changegears similar to a manualtransmission. To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shifterto upshift, or push the − (minus)end of the button to downshift.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑23.


1-16 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown

O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : For vehicles with XM, MP3,WMA, or RDS features, press todisplay additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS orXM station; or CD, MP3, WMAsong. Song title information will bedisplayed on the top line of thedisplay while the artist informationwill be displayed on the bottom line,if the information is available duringXM, CD, MP3, or WMA playback.When information is not available,"No Info" displays.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeInfotainment on page 7‑1 andOperation on page 7‑2.

Storing a Favorite Station

Depending on which radio thevehicle has, radio stations arestored as either favorites or presets.

For radios with a FAV button, amaximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radio


In Brief 1-17

station frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAV togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™stations.

For radios without a FAV button, upto 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, andsix AM), can be programmed on thesix numbered buttons.

See Operation on page 7‑2.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theRadio with CD (MP3) and USB portor Radio with a Single CD (MP3)player:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

2. Press O to turn the radio on.

3. Press H and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month,day, and year) displays.

4. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

5. Increase or decrease the time ordate by turning f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑5.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)See Satellite Radio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio Devices(Auxiliary Input orUSB Port)This vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and aUSB port, located on the audiofaceplate. Some portable audiodevices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑18.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.


1-18 In Brief

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑23.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted using the controlson the right side of the steeringwheel.

e + / e −: Increases or decreasesvolume.

w orx /c : Press to changeradio stations, select tracks on aCD, or to select tracks and navigatefolders on an iPod® or USB device.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withthe OnStar® or Bluetooth systems.

x /c : Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

J : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

RES+: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume a previously setspeed or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET−: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.


In Brief 1-19

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑31.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel.

INFO: Press to scroll through thevehicle information displays.

r : Press to reset some vehicleinformation displays, select apersonalization setting,or acknowledge a warningmessage.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑22.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons on the left side of thesteering wheel. These featuresinclude:. Oil Life Reset. Units. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. Language

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One accessory power outletis located inside the storage binbelow the climate controls and theother outlet is on the rear of thecenter storage console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.


1-20 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and releaset on the center

console. 4 illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑26.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑27.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The Electronic Stability Controlsystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction control

and Electronic Stability Control,press and holdt until 4 and gilluminate and the appropriateDIC messages are displayed.See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑26.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on both systems.

For more information, see ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.


In Brief 1-21

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑47.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑60 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑58.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE OILSOON DIC message when it isnecessary to change the engine oiland filter. The oil life system shouldbe reset to 100% only following anoil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and hold the DIC INFOand reset buttons, on the leftside of the steering wheel,at the same time to enter thepersonalization menu. The OILLIFE RESET message displays.

3. Press and hold the reset buttonuntil the DIC display showsACKNOWLEDGED.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑34.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.


1-22 In Brief

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowlywhen conditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login”)

Canada: chevroletowner.ca

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin your vehicle.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of your vehicle, contactRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.

With Remote Start Shown, WithoutRemote Start Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps turn offafter all of the doors are closed.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theremote lock feedback can beprogrammed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash toconfirm locking. See “LOCK HORN”and “LIGHT FLASH” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29 formore information.

Pressing Q may also arm theanti-theft alarm system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockthe driver door. Press K againwithin five seconds to unlock allremaining doors. The interior lampsturn on and stay on for 20 secondsor until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, theremote unlock feedback can beprogrammed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash toconfirm unlocking. See “UNLOCKHORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29 for more information.



The high‐beam headlamps, parkinglamps, and back‐up lamps maycome on each time K is pressed.See “EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29 for additional information.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the anti-theft alarm system.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold for aboutone second to unlock the trunk.The trunk can be opened with thetransmitter when the vehicle speedis less than 3 km/h (2 mph) or whenthe ignition is off.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The horn soundsthree times and the headlamps andturn signals flash three times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to initiate the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the

headlamps and turn signals flash for30 seconds. PressL again tocancel the panic alarm.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also beprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to fourtransmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the KEY FOBBATT (Battery) LOW messagedisplays in the DIC. See “KEY FOBBATT (Battery) LOW” under Keyand Lock Messages on page 5‑26for additional information.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch on the side.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that allows you tostart the engine from outside thevehicle. It may also start thevehicle's heating or air conditioningsystems and rear window defogger.When the remote start system isactive and the vehicle has anautomatic climate control system, itwill automatically regulate the insidetemperature. Normal operation ofthese systems will return after theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view when

doing so. Check local regulations forany requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif your vehicle is low on fuel. Yourvehicle may run out of fuel.

If your vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 foradditional information.

/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release thetransmitter's lock button, thenimmediately press and hold thetransmitter's remote start buttonfor about four seconds or untilthe vehicle's turn signal lampsflash. The doors will lock.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps turn on andremain on while the engine isrunning.

The remote start feature providestwo separate starts per ignitioncycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time, or one startwith a time extension. The first startmust expire or be canceled to gettwo separate 10 minute starts.



If it is the first remote start since thevehicle has been driven, repeat theprevious steps, while the engine isstill running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes from thetime you repeat the steps for remotestarting. The remote start runningtime can be extended one time andonly after the first remote start.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut offautomatically after 10 minutes,unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle's key is insertedinto the ignition switch and turned toON/RUN.

To manually shut off a remote start,do any of the following.. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and releasethe remote start button.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch out ofLOCK/OFF position and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

The parking lamps turn off toindicate the engine is off.

After the engine has been startedtwo times, or one time with a timeextension, the vehicle's ignitionmust be turned to ON/RUN usingthe key before the remote startprocedure can be used again. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9‑15 forinformation regarding the ignitionpositions on your vehicle.

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if any of the followoccur:. The vehicle's key is in the

ignition.. The vehicle's hood is open.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The check engine light is on.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑14.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts,or one start with a timeextension, have already beenprovided for that ignition cycle.

Remote Start Ready

If your vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature.

See your dealer if you would like toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature to your vehicle.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock your vehicle.

From the outside, turn the key in thedriver door lock counterclockwise tolock the door and clockwise tounlock it, or use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

From the inside, move the manuallock control on the door or use thepower door lock switch.

Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.



Door Ajar ReminderA chime will sound and theappropriate door message willdisplay if one of the doors is notfully closed. This happens when theignition is on and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park) or N (Neutral).See Door Ajar Messages onpage 5‑25.

Delayed LockingThis feature will delay the actuallocking of the doors and arming ofthe theft-deterrent system forfive seconds when the power doorlock switch or remote keyless entrytransmitter is used to lock thevehicle.

If any door is open when locking thevehicle, three chimes will soundsignaling that the delayed lockingfeature is active. Five seconds afterthe last door is closed, all of thedoors will lock. To cancel the delayand lock the doors immediately,

press the lock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter or thepower door lock switch a secondtime. The theft deterrent system willarm after 30 seconds.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle is programmed to lockall doors automatically when thefollowing are met:. All doors are closed.. The ignition is on.. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).

This feature cannot be disabled.

All doors will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

The power door unlock function canbe programmed through promptsdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑29.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lockswitch when the key is in theignition and any door is open, all thedoors will lock and then the driver'sdoor will unlock. Be sure to removethe key from the ignition whenlocking your vehicle.

If the remote keyless entrytransmitter is used to lock the doorswhile the key is in the ignition, achime will sound three times. Alldoors will then lock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.



Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.

Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate ControlSystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk from the outside,press the trunk release button onthe RKE transmitter.



Remote Trunk Release

Press the button located on thedriver door near the map pocket toopen the trunk.

The trunk can only be opened whilethe vehicle is in P (Park) or whenthe ignition is off.

Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.

The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-darkemergency trunk release handlelocated inside the trunk on the trunklatch. This handle glows followingexposure to light. Pull the releasehandle up to open the trunk from theinside.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle may have an anti-theftalarm system.

Arming the System

With the ignition off, press theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter lock button to arm thesystem.

The system will arm 30 secondsafter all the doors are closed,or 60 seconds with any door open.

If you press the lock button on thetransmitter a second time while allthe doors are closed, the system willarm immediately. The system willstill arm in 60 seconds if a door isopen. When the open door isclosed, the system will arm.

The security light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, comes onto indicate that arming has beeninitiated. Once the system is armed,the security light flashes once everythree seconds.

If the security light is flashing twiceper second, this means that a dooris open.

If the system is armed and the keyis used to unlock the vehicle, thealarm will be activated.

If you do not want to arm thesystem, lock the vehicle with themanual lock knob on the doors orwith the inside power door lockswitches.

The alarm will sound and theexterior lights will flash if anydoor is opened while armed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system:. Press the RKE transmitter

unlock button.. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

Once the system is disarmed, thesecurity light will stop flashing.

How the System Alarm isActivated

To activate the system if it is armed:. Open the driver's door or trunk.

A ten second pre-alarm chirp willsound followed by a thirtysecond full alarm of horn andlights.

. Open any other door. A fullalarm of horn and lights willimmediately sound for thirtyseconds.

. Open the hood. If the vehiclehas the remote start feature, itwill activate the full alarm.



When an alarm event has finished,the system will re-arm itselfautomatically.

How to Turn Off the SystemAlarm

To turn off the system alarm:. Press the lock button on the

RKE transmitter. The system willthen re-arm itself.

. Press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter. This will alsodisarm the system.

. Insert the key in the ignition andturn it on. This will also disarmthe system.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If three chirps are heard when theunlock or lock button is pressed onthe RKE transmitter, it means thatthe system alarm was previouslytriggered.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarms

the system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.



If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys canbe programmed for the vehicle. Thefollowing procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine will notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to ON/RUN withinfive seconds of the original keybeing turned to LOCK/OFF inStep 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed. It may not beapparent that the security lightwent on due to how quickly thekey is programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch locatedbelow the four-way control padto the left or right to chooseeither the driver side orpassenger side mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror in the desireddirection.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward toreturn it to its original position.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to heatthe mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑5 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center to move it for a clearerview of behind your vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind. Push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror witha compass display and OnStar®

controls. See your dealer for more



information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. SeeOnStar Overview on page 14‑1.

Press O to turn the compassdisplay on or off.

See Compass on page 5‑4 for moreinformation.

Automatic Dimming MirrorOperation

Vehicles with an automatic dimmingrearview mirror will automaticallyreduce the glare from theheadlamps of the vehicle behind.This feature comes on each timethe vehicle is started.

To turn the automatic dimmingfeature off or on, press and hold Ofor approximately six seconds oruntil the indicator light turns offor on.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).



Power Windows

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

Express-Down Window

The driver window has anexpress-down feature. This switch islabeled AUTO. Press the front allthe way down and release, toautomatically lower.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull the front of the switchmomentarily. To raise the window,pull and hold the front of the switch.

Express-Up Window

On windows with this feature, pullthe switch up to the second positionand release the switch to activatethe express-up feature. To stop thewindow as it is going up, pull up orpress down briefly on the switchagain.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the driverpower window will need to bere-programmed for the express-upfeature to work. Replace orrecharge the vehicle battery beforereprogramming.

To program the driver window:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, close alldoors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express‐up isactive, the window stops at theobstruction and auto‐reverses to apreset factory position. Weather



conditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window toauto‐reverse. The window returnsto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

Express Window Anti‐PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti‐pinchfeature can be overridden in asupervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the secondposition. The window rises for aslong as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the expressmode is re‐activated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Window Lockout

The rear window lockout switch ison the driver door. This featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Presso on the right side toactivate the lockout switch. The redline on the switch is not visible whenactivated.

Presso on the left side todeactivate the lockout switch. Thered line on the switch is visiblewhen deactivated.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

Sunroof

The sunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or if RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18.

Press and release the back of theswitch to open the sunroof tothe vent position. From the ventposition, press and release the back

of the switch to express-open thesunroof. To stop the sunroof fromexpress-opening, press the switchagain. If the sunshade is closed, itwill open automatically when thesunroof opens past the ventedposition.

A deflector will automatically raisewhen the sunroof is opened. Thedeflector will retract when thesunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, press the frontof the switch and hold it until thesunroof is closed. The sunroof willstop if the switch is released. Closethe sunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Notice: Forcing the sunshadeforward of the sliding glass panelmay cause damage and thesunroof may not operate properly.Always close the glass panelbefore closing the sunshade.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-47


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button located on top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The vehicle's front and rear seatoutboard head restraints are notdesigned to be removed.



Front Seats

Seat AdjustmentSeat Position

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat position:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.

Height Adjustment

If available, press and hold the topor bottom of the switch to raise orlower the seat. Release the switchwhen the desired height is reached.



Power Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust theseat while the vehicle is moving.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a power seat, if available:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

Lumbar Adjustment

A. Increase Lumbar SupportControl

B. Decrease Lumbar SupportControl

If available, press the front (A) orrear (B) of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support. Releasethe control when the desired level ofsupport is reached.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The safety belt cannot properlyrestrain you, and you could beinjured or killed.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.




To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if equipped:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.



If available, press the top of theswitch to turn the heat feature on tothe high heat setting. The indicatorlight “2” will be lit.

Press the top of the switch again togo to the low heat setting. Theindicator light “1” will be lit.

Press the bottom of the switch toturn the feature off.

The heated seats are canceledwhen the ignition is turned off.

Rear SeatsFolding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can befolded down for more cargo space.Adjust the seatback only when thevehicle is not moving.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback down:

1. Make sure the front seatback isnot reclined. If it is, the rearseatback will not fold down allthe way. If necessary, return thefront seatback to the uprightposition. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑4.

2. Pull up on the seatback strapwhile folding the seatback down.



Raising the Seatback

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To raise the seatback:

1. Push the seatback up and backto lock it into place.

2. Push and pull the top of theseatback to be sure it is lockedinto position.

3. Make sure that the safety beltsare properly stowed over theseatback in all three seatingpositions.

When the seat is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑12 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.



Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑30 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑32.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, just let the beltgo back all the way and startagain.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24 for more information. 3. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑16.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash. See “Shoulder BeltHeight Adjuster” later in thissection for instruction on useand important safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

Your vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger position.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑10.



Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash.

Pretensioners work only once.If they activate in a crash, they willneed to be replaced, and probablyother new parts for the vehicle'ssafety belt system. See ReplacingSafety Belt System Parts after aCrash on page 3‑16.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.



Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out frombetween the edge of theseatback and the interior body toremove the guide from itsstorage clip.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Pull theguide upward to expose its storageclip, and then slide the guide ontothe clip. Turn the guide and clipinward and slide them in betweenthe seatback and the interior body,leaving only the loop of the elasticcord exposed.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system

from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑16.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG in the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑21.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑30 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑32.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orright front passenger's head andchest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, and

whether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑17.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe side

crashes depending on the locationof the impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. A roof-railairbag is intended to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thevehicle or repair costs. For frontalairbags, inflation is determined bywhat the vehicle hits, the angle ofthe impact, and how quicklythe vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.



What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑19.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's body.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑21 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.

Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑19.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.



{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.

You can lock the doors, and turn offthe interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑19 and Vehicle DataRecording on page 13‑19.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑13.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag should be allowed to inflateor not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger airbag andseat‐mounted side impact airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. The front outboard passengerseat is occupied by a smallerperson, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator will light andstay lit as a reminder that theairbags are off. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑13.



The passenger sensing systemis designed to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags tobe enabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbags are active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑47or Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑45.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.



If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child restraint in arear seat position in the vehicleand see your dealer.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sitting

properly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importanceof proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how wellthe passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑28 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.



{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑16.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, side impactsensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system thatincludes sensors as part of the frontoutboard passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seat



heater or a comfort‐enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24.

If your vehicle needs to be modifiedbecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑19. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.



If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑11 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.



. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑11.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be



sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

distributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑38 formore information. Children can be



endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑24 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.

If you secure a child restraint in theleft or center rear seat usingLATCH, review the followingillustrations. Depending on whereyou place the child restraint, youmay not be able to access certainsafety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints.

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt



A. Occupant prohibited

B. Child restraint using LATCH

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

C. Child restraint using safety beltor LATCH or occupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.

The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.



Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑36 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint so

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

children cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.



If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑36. Depending on where youplace the child restraint, you maynot be able to access certain safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers or childrestraints.

You cannot secure three childrestraints using the LATCH anchorsin the rear seat at the same time,but you can install two of them.If you want to do this, install oneLATCH child restraint in thepassenger-side position, andinstall the other one either in thedriver-side position or in the centerposition. Refer to the followingillustration to learn which anchorsto use.

A. Passenger Side Rear SeatLower Anchors

B. Center Rear Seat LowerAnchors

C. Driver Side Rear Seat LowerAnchors

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.

Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachmentsto secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint , raise it.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether underthe headrest or headrestraint and in betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tetherroute the tether underthe headrest or headrestraint and in betweenthe headrest or headrestraint posts. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure itis securely held in place. Tocheck, grasp the child restraintat the LATCH path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.



Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑38 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.



If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑36.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑38 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑36.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑13 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑24 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑38 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑13.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator islit, see “If the On Indicator is Litfor a Child Restraint” underPassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑24 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Additional Storage FeaturesConvenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

An instrument panel storage area,with a removable liner, is locatedabove the radio. Slide the latchtoward the rear of the vehicle toopen the storage area.

Glove BoxPull the handle up to open.

Cupholders

Removable cupholders are locatedin front of the center console.


4-2 Storage

Push down on the cover handle (A)and then forward to access thecupholders.

To remove the cupholders:

1. Press and hold the tab at therear of the cupholders.

2. Lift up and rearward.

To reinstall, place the two forwardtabs into the slots and push downon the rear of the cupholder.

For vehicles with rear seatcupholders, access them by pullingdown on the door at the back of thecenter console.

It has a storage tray and removablecupholders.

Front Storage

Storage is available in front of theshift lever. Open it by pushing onthe bottom of the door.


Storage 4-3

A driver side storage compartmentis located near the steering columnon the bottom of the instrumentpanel. Pull the cover down to open.Pull out to remove for cleaning.

Center Console Storage

The center console storage has atray and a main storage area. Pullup on the latch (A) to access thetray. Pull up on the latch (B) toaccess the main storage. It isequipped with a removable divider.There may be a storage pocket atthe rear of the center console.

The armrest on top of the centerconsole can be adjusted to arearward, middle, and forwardposition. Pull or push the front of thearmrest to adjust to the desiredposition.

An additional storage area is in frontof the main storage.


4-4 Storage

Push down on the cover handle (A)and then forward to access thestorage area.

Additional StorageFeatures

Convenience NetUse the rear convenience net tostore small items. The net shouldnot be used to store heavy loads.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-14MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Brake System Messages . . . . 5-25Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-25Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-26Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-26Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-28Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-28Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-29

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-29


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The lever is located on the left sideof the steering wheel column.

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.

e + / e − (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the radiovolume.

w orx /c (Next/Previous):Press to change radio stations,select tracks on a CD, or to selecttracks and navigate folders on aniPod® or USB device.

To change radio stations:

. Press and releasew orx /cto go to the next or previousradio station stored as a preset.

. Press and holdw orx /c togo to the next or previous radiostation in the selected band witha strong signal.

To select tracks on a CD:

Press and releasew orx /c togo to the next or previous track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice:

1. Press and holdw orx /cwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.



2. Press and releasew orx /cto scroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw to play thehighlighted track.

To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device:

1. Press and holdw orx /cwhile listening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdx /c to goback to the previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orx /cto scroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw when the folderis highlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press andholdx /c.

x /c (End/Mute): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on.

b / g (Voice Recognition): Forvehicles with Bluetooth® or OnStar®

systems press and hold b / g forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems. See Bluetoothon page 7‑23 and OnStar Overviewon page 14‑1 for more information.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering wheel.

Move the lever to control thewindshield wipers.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Intermittent; Speed SensitiveWipers): For intermittent or speedsensitive operation. While in thisposition, turn thex band up ordown to vary frequency.

The amount of delay time variesbetween wiping cycles due to thedelay setting selected or the speedof the vehicle. As vehicle speed isincreased or decreased, the wiperinterval also increases ordecreases.



6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, move thelever down, then release it. Severalwipes, hold the lever down.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them.

If frozen to the windshield, carefullyloosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades should be replaced.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker stopsthe motor until it cools. If the motorgets stuck, turn the wipers off, clearaway the snow or ice, and then turnthe wipers back on.

As an added safety feature, if thewipers are on for more than15 seconds, the vehicle'sheadlamps turn on automatically.They turn off 15 seconds after thewipers are turned off.

Windshield Washer

Press the button at the end of thewindshield wiper lever until thewashers begin.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

When the button is released, thewashers stop, but the wiperscontinue to wipe about three timesor resume the previous speed.

Compass

Compass Operation

Press O on the rearview mirror toturn the compass display on or off.

When the ignition and the compassfeature are on, the compassdisplays the current compassdirection after a few seconds.

Compass Calibration

If after a few seconds the displaydoes not show a compass direction,(N for North for example), there maybe a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass.Interference can be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If theletter C appears in the compasswindow, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated bydriving the vehicle very slowly, incircles, until the display reads adirection.



Compass Variance

The mirror is set in zone eight. It isnecessary to adjust the compass tocompensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zoneeight. Under certain circumstances,such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it is necessary toadjust the compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location andvariance zone number on thezone map that follows.

2. Press and hold O until a zonenumber displays.

3. Once the zone number displays,press O repeatedly until thecorrect zone number is reached.If C appears in the compasswindow, the compass may needcalibration. See “CompassCalibration” listed previously.

Clock

Without Date Display

AM/FM Base Radio with a SingleCD Player

To set the time:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press the O knob to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button until the hourbegins flashing on the display.Press the H button a secondtime and the minute beginsflashing on the display.

3. While either the hour or theminute numbers are flashing,turn the f knob to increase ordecrease the time.



4. Press the H button again untilthe clock display stops flashingto set the currently displayedtime; otherwise, the flashingstops after five seconds and thecurrent time displayed isautomatically set.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour, press theH button until 12H or 24H isdisplayed. Once 12H or 24H isdisplayed, turn the f knob to thedesired option to select the setting.Press the H button again to applythe setting, or let the screentime out.

With Date Display

Radio with CD (MP3) and USBPort, and Radio with Single CD(MP3) Player

To set the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.Press the O knob to turn theradio on.

2. Press the H button and the HR,MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,minute, month, day, and year)displays.

3. Press the softkey located belowany one of the tabs that youwant to change.

4. To increase the time or date doone of the following:. Press the softkey located

below the selected tab.

. Press the ¨ SEEK,

or\ FWD button.

. Turn the f knob clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date doone of the following:

. Press the © SEEK

ors REV button.

. Turn the f knobcounterclockwise.

The date does not automaticallydisplay. To see the date press Hwhile the radio is on. The date withdisplay times out after a fewseconds and goes back to thenormal radio and time display.

To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press the H button and then thesoftkey located below theforward arrow label. Once thetime 12H and 24H, and the dateMM/DD/YYYY (month, day, andyear) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,month, and year) displays.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe desired option.

3. Press the H button again toapply the selected default, or letthe screen time out.



Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There are two accessory poweroutlets. One accessory power outletis located inside the storage binbelow the climate controls and theother outlet is on the rear of thecenter storage console.

Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use. Theaccessory power outlet isoperational at all times.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑45.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternating Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outletcomes on when in use. The ignitionmust be in ON/RUN and equipmentrequiring less than 150 watts isplugged into the outlet, and nosystem fault is detected.



If you try to connect equipmentusing more than 150 watts or asystem fault is detected, aprotection circuit shuts off the powersupply and the indicator light turnsoff. To reset the circuit, unplug theitem and plug it back in or turn theRemote Accessory Power (RAP) offand then back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑18. The power restarts whenequipment that operates within thelimit is plugged into the outlet and asystem fault is not detected.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supplysuch as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English shown, Metric similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑22 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English



When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the fuel tank. When the indicatornears empty, a message in theDriver Information Center (DIC)displays. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑26 for moreinformation. The vehicle still has alittle fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe fueled soon. An arrow on the fuelgauge indicates the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. These arenormal and do not indicate aproblem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the gas

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thefuel tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or lessthan half the fuel tank's capacityto fill it.

. The indicator moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. If the pointermoves towards the H (UnitedStates) or to the shaded thermostatsymbol area (Canada), the engine istoo hot.

A temperature indicator light turnson and a chime sounds.

The vehicle is operated undernormal driving conditions and thetemperature indicator light comeson, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine assoon as possible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt. Unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminder light,several seconds after the engine isstarted, a chime sounds for severalseconds to remind the frontpassenger to buckle their safetybelt. The passenger safety belt lightflashes and then stays on solid untilthe belt is buckled. This cyclecontinues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The passenger safety belt reminderlight and chime may turn on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑17.



The airbag readiness light comes onsolid for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message can also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑28 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑24 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbagare enabled (may inflate).



If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal and seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. This light couldindicate that there are problems witha generator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑15 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.



Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications to

these systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.



. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑34.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN

while the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release . If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means there is a brakeproblem.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)may display a BRAKE FLUIDmessage. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑25 for moreinformation.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and carefully stop.The brake pedal may be harder topush or the pedal may go closer tothe floor. It may take longer to stop.Try turning off and restarting thevehicle one or two times, if the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑79

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.



If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑25 forall brake-related DIC messages.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the traction control button.

This light and the Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off light come onwhen ESC is turned off.

If the TCS is off, wheelspin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theElectronic Stability Control (ESC)system is turned off. If ESC is off,the Traction Control System (TCS)is also off.



If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the ESCsystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) or the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the ESCsystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 for more information.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. If the systemis working normally the indicatorlight goes off.

Notice: Driving with the enginecoolant temperature warning lighton could cause the vehicle tooverheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑17. The vehicle'sengine could be damaged, and itmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Never drive withthe engine coolant temperaturewarning light on.



The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑17for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑25 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑45 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑48 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure LightNotice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicate thestatus of the anti-theft alarm systemwhen the ignition is turned off. Thelight will flash rapidly if the alarmsystem is arming and one or more

of the monitored entry points is notclosed. The light will stay on if thealarm is arming and all entry pointsare closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑11.

High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑31 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC). The DICdisplay gives you the status of manyof your vehicle's systems. The DICis also used to display driverpersonalization menu modes andwarning/status messages. Allmessages will appear in the DICdisplay, located at the bottom of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC buttons are located on theleft side of the steering wheel.

INFO (Information): Press thisbutton to scroll through the vehicleinformation mode displays.

r (Reset): Press this button toreset some vehicle informationmode displays, select apersonalization menu mode setting,or acknowledge a warningmessage.

Press and hold the information andreset buttons at the same time forone second, then release thebuttons to enter the personalizationmenu. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑29 for more information.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. The DIC has different modeswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing.

Information Modes

INFO (Information): Press thisbutton to scroll through the followingvehicle information modes:

Outside Air Temperature

The outside air temperature will bedisplayed at the same time as theOdometer and the Trip Odometer.



The temperature outside of thevehicle will be displayed in eitherdegrees Celsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F). The outside airtemperature appears on the left sideof the DIC display and theodometer, or trip odometer, appearson the right side of the display.

Odometer

Press the information button untilthe outside air temperature and theodometer displays. This modeshows the total distance the vehiclehas been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

To change the DIC display toEnglish or metric units, see “UNITS”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑29.

Trip Odometer

Press the information button untilthe outside air temperature alongwith A or B displays. These modesshow the current distance traveledsince the last reset for each tripodometer in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Both odometers canbe used at the same time.

To reset the trip odometer to zero,press and hold the reset button for afew seconds while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

FUEL RANGE

Press the information button untilFUEL RANGE displays. This modeshows the remaining distance youcan drive without refueling in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi). It isbased on fuel economy and the fuelremaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUELRANGE LOW displays.

The fuel economy data used todetermine fuel range is an averageof recent driving conditions. As yourdriving conditions change, this datais gradually updated. The FUELRANGE mode cannot be reset.

MPG (L/100 KM) AVG (Average)

Press the information button untilMPG (L/100 KM) AVG displays. Thismode shows how many liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg) your vehicle isgetting based on current and pastdriving conditions.

To reset the average fuel economy,press and hold the reset buttonwhile MPG (L/100 KM) AVG isdisplayed. Average fuel economy isthen calculated starting from thatpoint. If the average fuel economy isnot reset, it is continually updatedeach time you drive.



MPG (L/100 KM) INST(Instantaneous)

Press the information button untilMPG (L/100 KM) INST displays. Thismode shows the current fueleconomy at a particular momentand changes frequently as drivingconditions change. This modeshows the instantaneous fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). Unlike average fueleconomy, this screen cannot bereset.

AV (Average) SPEED

Press the information button until AVSPEED displays. This mode showsthe vehicle's average speed inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph).

To reset the average vehicle speed,press and hold the reset buttonwhile AV SPEED is displayed.

OIL LIFE

Press the information button untilOIL LIFE displays. The engine oillife system shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life. It shows100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It alerts you tochange the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑8 andMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Always reset the engine oil lifesystem after an oil change. See“How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem” under Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑11.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure isshown in either kilopascals (kPa) orpounds per square inch (psi). Pressthe information button untilLF ## PSI (kPa) ## RF displays forthe front tires. Press the informationbutton again untilLR ## PSI (kPa) ## RR displays forthe rear tires.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air will appear in the display.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑45and Tire Messages on page 5‑28 formore information.



Vehicle MessagesThe following messages appear ifthere is a problem detected in oneof your vehicle's systems.

A message clears when thevehicle's condition is no longerpresent. To acknowledge amessage and clear it from thedisplay, press and hold any of theDIC buttons. If the condition is stillpresent, the warning messagecomes back on the next time thevehicle is turned off and back on.With most messages, a warningchime sounds when the messagedisplays. Your vehicle may haveother warning messages.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID

This message displays, while theignition is on, when the brake fluidlevel is low. The brake systemwarning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. SeeBrake System Warning Light on

page 5‑17 for more information.Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.

PUSH PARK PEDAL

This message displays if the parkingbrake is left engaged. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE ENGAGED

This message displays when thecruise control system is active. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑31 formore information.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR AJAR

This message displays if one ormore of the vehicle's doors are notclosed properly. Make sure that thedoor(s) are closed completely.

TRUNK AJAR

This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Makesure that the trunk is closedcompletely. See Trunk on page 2‑9for more information.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE OIL SOON

This message displays when the lifeof the engine oil has expired and itshould be changed.

When this message isacknowledged and cleared from thedisplay, the engine oil life systemmust still be reset separately. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11, Engine Oil onpage 10‑8, and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.



Engine Power Messages

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power)REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

CHECK GAS CAP

This message displays if the fuelcap has not been fully tightened.Recheck the fuel cap to make surethat it is on properly. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installedshould turn the message off.

LOW FUEL

This message displays when yourvehicle is low on fuel. Refill the fueltank as soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑10, Fuel onpage 9‑33, and Filling the Tank onpage 9‑37 for more information.

Key and Lock Messages

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW

This message displays if theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replacethe battery in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTO (Automatic)LIGHTS OFF

This message displays if theautomatic headlamp system isdisabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON

This message displays if theautomatic headlamp system isenabled with the headlamp switch.See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ESC (Electronic StabilityControl) ACTIVE

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clusterflashes when ESC is assisting you



with directional control of thevehicle. You may feel or hear thesystem working and see thismessage displayed in the DIC.Slippery road conditions may existwhen this message is displayed, soadjust your driving accordingly. Thismessage may stay on for a fewseconds after ESC stops assistingyou with directional control of thevehicle. This is normal when thesystem is operating. See ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.

ESC (Electronic StabilityControl) OFF

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when ESC is turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.

See Electronic Stability Control(ESC) on page 9‑29 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC)/TractionControl System (TCS) Indicator/Warning Light on page 5‑19 formore information.

LOW TRACTION

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clusterflashes when the system is activelylimiting wheel spin. Slippery roadconditions may exist if this messageis displayed, so adjust your drivingaccordingly. This message stays onfor a few seconds after the systemstops limiting wheel spin. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑27 and Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Indicator/WarningLight on page 5‑19 for moreinformation.

SERVICE ESC (ELECTRONICSTABILITY CONTROL)

If your vehicle has ElectronicStability Control (ESC), thismessage displays and a chimesounds if there has been a problemdetected with ESC. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detectedproblem remains present. When thismessage displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) on page 9‑29 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.

If this message turns on while youare driving, pull off the road as soonas possible and stop carefully. Tryresetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on.



If this message still stays on orturns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service.Have the ESC inspected by yourdealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE TRACTION

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and a chimesounds when the system is notfunctioning properly. The ESC/TCSlight also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. This light stays onsolid as long as the detectedproblem remains present. When thismessage displays, the system is notworking. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑27 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.Have the system serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.

TRACTION OFF

If your vehicle has the TractionControl System (TCS), thismessage displays and the ESC/TCSlight on the instrument panel clustercomes on solid when the system isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑27 andElectronic Stability Control (ESC)/Traction Control System (TCS)Indicator/Warning Light onpage 5‑19 for more information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays when thereis a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer immediately.

Service Vehicle Messages

ENGINE DISABLED

This message displays if the startingof the engine is disabled. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

POWER STEERING

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if a problem has beendetected with the electric powersteering. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

Tire Messages

SVC (Service) TIRE MONITOR

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5‑20.



Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑48 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low on air. The lowtire pressure warning light alsocomes on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑20. If this messageappears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 10‑38, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10, and TirePressure on page 10‑45. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑22.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE

This message displays when theoutside air temperature is coldenough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Washer Fluid Messages

LOW WASHER FLUID

This message displays when thevehicle's windshield washer fluid islow. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir to the proper level as soonas possible. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑19.

VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle has personalizationcapabilities that allow you toprogram certain features to apreferred setting. All of the featureslisted may not be available on yourvehicle. Only the features availablewill be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the featureswere set when your vehicle left thefactory, but may have been changedfrom their default state sincethat time.

To change feature settings, use thefollowing procedure:

Entering Personalization Menu

1. Turn the ignition on while thevehicle is stopped.

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.



2. Press and hold the informationand reset buttons at the sametime for one second, thenrelease to enter thepersonalization menu.

If the vehicle speed is greaterthan 3 km/h (2 mph), only theUNITS menu will be accessible.

3. Press the information button toscroll through the availablepersonalization menu modes.

Press the reset button to scrollthrough the available settings foreach mode.

If you do not make a selectionwithin ten seconds, the displaywill go back to the previousinformation displayed.

Personalization Menu Modes

OIL LIFE RESET

When this feature is displayed, youcan reset the engine oil life system.To reset the system, see Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11. See

“OIL LIFE” under Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22 for moreinformation.

UNITS

This feature allows you to select theunits of measurement in which theDIC will display the vehicleinformation. When UNITS appearson the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one secondto scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default in UnitedStates): All information will bedisplayed in English units.

METRIC (default in Canada): Allinformation will be displayed inmetric units.

To select a setting and move on tothe next feature, press theinformation button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

REMOTE START

If your vehicle has remote start, thisfeature allows remote start to beturned off or on. Remote start allowsyou to start the engine from outsideof the vehicle using your RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.When REMOTE START appears onthe display, press and hold the resetbutton for at least one second toscroll through the available settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for more information.




LOCK HORN

This feature, which allows thevehicle's horn to chirp every timethe lock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When LOCK HORNappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will notchirp on the first press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter. Thehorn will still chirp on the secondpress.

ON: The horn will chirp on the firstpress of the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.


UNLOCK HORN

This feature, which allows thevehicle's horn to chirp on the firstpress of the unlock button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, can be enabled ordisabled. When UNLOCK HORNappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

OFF (default): The horn will notchirp when the unlock button on theRKE transmitter is pressed.

ON: The horn will chirp on the firstpress of the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.



LIGHT FLASH

This feature, which allows thevehicle's exterior hazard/turn signallighting to flash every time the lock,unlock, or trunk release buttons onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter are pressed, can beenabled or disabled. When LIGHTFLASH appears on the display,press and hold the reset button forat least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

OFF: The exterior hazard/turnsignal lighting will not flash whenthe lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.

ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will flash whenthe lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter arepressed.





DELAY LOCK

This feature, which delays theactual locking of the vehicle, can beenabled or disabled. When DELAYLOCK appears on the display, pressand hold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor is closed. You can temporarilyoverride delayed locking bypressing the power lock switch orthe lock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter asecond time.

OFF: The doors will lockimmediately when pressing thepower lock switch or the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

See Power Door Locks on page 2‑7,Delayed Locking on page 2‑8, andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.


AUTO UNLK (Unlock)

This feature, which allows thevehicle to automatically unlockcertain doors, can be enabled ordisabled. When AUTO UNLKappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

ALL (default): All of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER: The driver's door willautomatically unlock.

NONE: None of the doors willautomatically unlock. You will needto manually unlock the doors.

See Automatic Door Locks onpage 2‑8 for more information.


UNLK (Unlock)

This screen displays only if DRIVERor ALL is selected for the AUTOUNLK feature. This featuredetermines when the automatic doorunlocking will occur. When UNLKappears on the display, press andhold the reset button for at leastone second to scroll through theavailable settings:

KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlockwhen the key is turned off.



SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): Thedoor(s) will unlock when the vehicleis shifted into P (Park).

See Automatic Door Locks onpage 2‑8 for more information.


EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS

This feature, which allows thevehicle's exterior perimeter lightingto turn on each time the unlockbutton on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter is pressed, can beenabled or disabled. When EXTLIGHTS appears on the display,press and hold the reset button forat least one second to scroll throughthe available settings:

OFF: The exterior perimeterlighting will not turn on when theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.

ON (default): The exteriorperimeter lighting will turn on whenthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed.



LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to select thelanguage in which the DIC willdisplay. When LANGUAGE appearson the display, press and hold thereset button for at least one secondto scroll through the availablesettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRENCH: All messages will appearin French.

SPANISH: All messages willappear in Spanish.

GERMAN: All messages willappear in German.

To select a setting and exit out ofthe personalization menu mode,press the information button whilethe desired setting is displayed onthe DIC.

Exiting Personalization Menu

The personalization menu will beexited when any of the followingconditions occur:. A ten second time period has

elapsed.. The ignition is turned off.. The end of the personalization

menu list is reached.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The band on the lever located onthe left side of the steering column,operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has thefollowing four positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps and taillamps only.


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic HeadlampSystem): Automatically turns onthe Daytime Running Lamps duringdaytime, and the headlamps,parking lamps, and taillamps atnight.

P (Off/On): Turn the band to thisposition to turn on the AutomaticHeadlamp System. In Canada, thisposition only works when a vehicleis in the P (Park) position.

To turn on the Automatic HeadlampSystem, turn the switch to off/on.To turn them off, turn the switch tooff/on again. This is a momentarycontrol switch that springs backwhen released. The AutomaticHeadlamp System always turns onat the beginning of an ignition cycle.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf the drivers door is opened and theignition is turned off while leavingthe lamps on, a warning chime willsound.

HeadlampHigh/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from lowbeam to high beam, push the turnsignal/multifunction lever awayfrom you.

This instrument panel clusterlight3 comes on if the highbeam lamps are turned on whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN.

To change the headlamps from highbeam to low beam, pull the turnsignal lever toward you.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets the high-beamheadlamps be used to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass.

Pull the turn signal/multifunctionlever toward you until the high-beamheadlamps come on, then releasethe lever to turn them off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional DRL are required onall vehicles first sold in Canada. Thevehicle has a light sensor on top ofthe instrument panel that controlsthe DRL. Do not cover this sensoror the head lamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The DRL system makes thelow-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The exterior lamps control is in

the parking lamps only position(This applies only to vehiclesthat are first sold in Canada).


Lighting 6-3

. The light sensor detects daytimelight.

. The parking brake is released orthe vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL system is on, thetaillamps, sidemarker lamps,parking lamps, and instrument panellights are not on unless you turn theexterior lamps control to the parkinglamp position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when they areneeded.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness along with other lampssuch as the taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights. The radio lights willalso be dim.

The vehicle has a light sensor ontop of the instrument panel thatcontrols the automatic headlampsystem. Do not cover the sensor orthe automatic headlamp system willturn on when it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the DRL and theautomatic headlamp systems sothat driving under bridges or brightoverhead street lights does notaffect the system. The DRL andautomatic headlamp systems willonly be affected when the lightsensor sees a change in lightinglasting longer than this delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes about one minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑5.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off, turnthe ignition on and set the exteriorlight switch to the off/on position.For vehicles first sold in Canada,the transmission must stay inP (Park) for this function.

The regular headlamps should beused when needed.


6-4 Lighting

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps featurekeeps the headlamps on for20 seconds after the key is turned toLOCK/OFF, then the headlampsautomatically turn off.

To override the 20 second delayedheadlamp feature while it is activeturn the turn signal/multifunctionlever up one position and then backto AUTO.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Release the lever and theturn signal automatically flashesthree times. If more flashes aredesired, continue to hold the lever.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If a turn signal arrow flashes rapidlyor does not come on, a signal bulbmay need to be replaced. SeeFuses on page 10‑31.


Lighting 6-5

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thebutton for this feature is located onthe instrument panel, to the left ofthe steering wheel.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to work.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen the fog lamps are on.

The parking lamps automaticallyturn on and off when the fog lampsare turned on and off.

The fog lamps turn off while thehigh-beam headlamps areturned on.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThe knob for this control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights. Turn theknob completely clockwise to turnon the interior lamps.


6-6 Lighting

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened. They turn off afterall the doors are closed.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon by turning the instrument panelbrightness knob, located on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering column, clockwise to thefarthest position. In this position, thedome lamps remain on whether adoor is opened or closed.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with front and rearreading lamps, press the lens toturn the lamp on and off, while thedoors are closed. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

Lighting Features

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened. Theselamps fade out about 20 secondsafter all of the doors have beenclosed or when the ignition is turnedto ON/RUN. They also come onwhen the unlock symbol button orthe horn symbol is pressed on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay onfor about 20 seconds after the key isremoved from the ignition to providelight as you exit.

Parade DimmingParade dimming is a separatelighting mode that comes on whilethe parking lamps are turned onduring the day. It prevents thedisplay lights and indicator lightsfrom being dim, while the parkinglamps are used during the day.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


Lighting 6-7

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑22.

Battery Power ProtectionThe vehicle has a battery run-downprotection feature designed toprotect the vehicle's battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk,reading, or visor vanity) is left onwhile the ignition is turned off, thebattery run-down protection systemwill automatically shut the lamp(s)off after 20 minutes. This will avoiddraining the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, doone of the following:. Turn on the ignition.. Turn the exterior lamp control off

and then on.. Open a door.. Press any Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) transmitter button(if equipped).

. Press the remote trunk releasebutton.

. Press the power door lockswitch.

The battery run-down feature willalso be activated when any door onthe vehicle is left open and theignition is in LOCK/OFF.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Introduction

InfotainmentDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system. If thatequipment is replaced oradditional equipment is added toyour vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacement


7-2 Infotainment System

or additional equipment iscompatible with your vehiclebefore installing it. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD (Base)



Radio with CD (MP3) and USB Port shown, Radio with CD (MP3) similar

The vehicle has one of these radiosas its infotainment system.

Softkeys

The Radio with CD (MP3) and USBPort, and the Radio with CD (MP3)have five softkeys located below theradio display. Softkeys are used to

control functions that appear on theradio display as tabs directly abovethe softkeys.

Using the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.While the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): Radios with the SpeedCompensated Volume (SCV) featureautomatically adjust the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to thedesired level.

2. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM tab on the radiodisplay.

4. Press the softkey under thedesired Speed CompensatedVolume setting (OFF, Low, Med,or High) to select the level ofradio volume compensation.



The display times out afterapproximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for moreradio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Treble) Radio with CD

To adjust the bass, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until Bass orTreble displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK button.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV button.

EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designedfor different types of music.

Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)Radio with CD (MP3) and USBPort, Radio with CD (MP3)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust the bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press the f knob until the tonecontrol tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired tonecontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.


or © SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV button.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey positioned underthe BASS, MID, or TREB tab formore than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press the f knob for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds.



EQ (Equalization): Press thisbutton to choose bass and trebleequalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass ortreble, returns the EQ to the manualbass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD

To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the` or press

the f knob until the speakercontrol label displays.

2. To adjust the setting, do one ofthe following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press either ¨ SEEK,

or © SEEK button.

. Press either\ FWD,

ors REV button.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade) Radio with CD(MP3) and USB Port, Radiowith CD (MP3)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance or fade:

1. Press the f knob until thespeaker control tabs display.

2. Highlight the desired speakercontrol tab by doing one of thefollowing:

. Pressing the f knob.

. Press the softkey under thedesired tab.

3. Adjust the setting by doing oneof the following:

. Turn the f knob clockwiseor counterclockwise.


or © SEEK button.

. Press the\ FWD,

ors REV button.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press the f knob for more thantwo seconds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: Displays if theradio is no longer calibratedproperly for the vehicle. The vehiclemust be returned to your dealer forservice.

Loc or Locked: Displays when theTheftLock® system has activated.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

4 (Information) (RDS Features):For vehicles with RDS features,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentFM-RDS station. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist information

displays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (RDS Features): Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song title orartist information is longer than whatcan be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM™ (ifequipped) on the Radio with CD(Base). Press to choose betweenFM, AM, XM (if equipped) on theRadio with CD (MP3) and USB Port,or the Radio with CD (MP3).

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release © SEEK to go to theprevious station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press © SEEK again tostop scanning.



. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press andhold © SEEK for four secondsuntil a double beep sounds. Theradio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next stored preset.Press © SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

¨ SEEK: Press to seek or scanstations with a strong signal in theselected band.. To seek stations, press and

release ¨ SEEK to go to thenext station and stay there.

. To scan stations, press and hold¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press ¨ SEEK again tostop scanning.

. To scan preset stations in theselected band, press andhold ¨ SEEK for four seconds

until a double beep sounds. Theradio goes to a stored preset,plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next stored preset.Press ¨ SEEK again to stopscanning preset stations.

Storing Radio Stations

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Radios that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites, up to36 stations can be programmed asfavorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the FAV button.Press the FAV button to go throughup to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations availableper page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM,FM, or XM, if equipped, stations.

Radios that do not have a FAVbutton store radio stations aspresets, up to 18 stations (six FM1,six FM2, and six AM), can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.

Storing a Radio Station as aPreset

Radios that have numberedpushbuttons store radio stations aspresets.

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2,and six AM), can be programmed onthe six numbered buttons.

To store preset stations:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons forthree seconds until a beepsounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to storeadditional radio stations.



Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Radio that have a FAV button storeradio stations as favorites.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to a radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service that isbased in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If XMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display "No SubscriptionPlease Renew" on channel XM1.For more information, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

4 (Information) (XM Satellite RadioService): For vehicles with XM,press 4 to display additional textinformation related to the currentXM channel. If information isavailable, the song title informationdisplays on the top line of thedisplay and artist informationdisplays on the bottom line. Wheninformation is not available, “NOINFO” displays.

Auto Text (Satellite RadioService): If additional information isavailable for the current song beingplayed, Auto Text will automaticallypage/scroll the information everythree seconds above the FAVpresets on the radio display. Bydefault, Auto Text is enabled.

To change the Auto Text setting:


2. Press the softkey under AUTOTXT tab on the radio display.

3. Press the softkey under the ONor OFF tab on the radio display.



If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everythree seconds when Auto Text isactivated.

Finding an XM Channel

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.

f (Tune): Turn to manually selectan XM channel.

© SEEK: Press to go to theprevious XM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

© SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a cahnnel, plays for afew seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press © SEEKagain to stop scanning.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nextXM channel.. To scan stations, press and hold

¨ SEEK for a few seconds untilthe radio beeps once. The radio

goes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press ¨ SEEK again tostop scanning.

s REV: Press to go to theprevious XM category.

\ FWD: Press to go to the nextXM category.

Finding a Category (CAT)Channel

To find XM channels in a category:

1. Press the CAT button to displaythe category tabs. Continuepressing the CAT button until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressing the\ FWD or thes REVbutton.

2. Press either of the two softkeysbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station in that category.

To go to the previous or next XMstation in the selected category,do one of the following:

. Turn the f knob.

. Press the softkey below theright or left arrows in thecategory tab.

. Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK.

3. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.

Adding and Removing Categories

Categories cannot be added orremoved while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

To add or remove a category:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe XM CAT tab.

3. Turn the f knob to display thecategory you want to add orremove.



4. Press the softkey located underthe Add or Remove tab.

To restore all removedcategories, press the softkeyunder the Restore All tab.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Storing XM Channels

Drivers are encouraged to storeradio station while the vehicle isparked, see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2. Tune to stored radiostations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls,if the vehicle has this feature.

Up to 36 stations can beprogrammed as favorites using thesix softkeys below the radio stationfrequency tabs and by using theFAV button. Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM,if equipped, stations.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to an XM channel.

2. Press the FAV button to displaythe page where the station willbe stored.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 tostore additional radio stations.

The number of favorites pages canbe setup using the MENU button. Tosetup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey located belowthe FAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the number of favoritespages by pressing the softkeylocated below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let themenu time out, to return to theoriginal main radio screenshowing the radio stationfrequency tabs and to begin theprocess of programmingfavorites.

XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, orany others, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.



Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If this

message is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver or antennacould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.



If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaFor vehicles with XM satellite radioservice, the antenna is located onthe roof of the vehicle. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear radio reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerSome CD players can play MP3CD-R or CD-RW discs, see “MP3”later in this section for moreinformation.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single discs with anadapter ring.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add labels to a disc, it couldget caught in the CD player. Use amarking pen to write on the top ofthe disc if a description is needed.

Do not use CD lens cleaners, theycould damage the CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,



load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

Store a disc in its original case or aprotective case and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. If thebottom of a disc is damaged it maynot play properly or at all. Do nottouch the bottom of a disc whilehandling it, pick it up by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a disc is dirty, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Inserting a Disc

Insert the disc partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the disc begins playing.

Use an adapter ring when playingthe smaller 8 cm (3 in) discs.Smaller discs with the adapter ringare loaded the same way as afull-size disc.

Ejecting a Disc

Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc.If the disc is not removed afterseveral seconds, the CD playerautomatically pulls the disc back in.

Playing a CD

When a CD is inserted into theplayer the CD symbol displays, andas each new track starts to play thetrack number displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwhen a CD is in the player, the CDstays in the player. If the ignition orradio is turned on when a CD is in

the player, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

Buttons and Knobs

The buttons and knobs on the radiocontrol the following features.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe current track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press andhold or press multiple times tocontinue moving backward throughthe tracks on the CD.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through the tracks onthe CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly within atrack. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release to resumeplaying the track.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume and theelapsed time of the track displays.Release to resume playing thetrack.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the CD player.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while listening to theradio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control functionsthat display as tabs.

The softkeys below the radio displaycontrol the following features.

RDM (Random): Tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order.

To use random:

1. Press the softkey below RDMtab until Random Current Discdisplays.

2. Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

MP3 Supported Files

The Radio with CD (MP3), Radiowith USB and CD (MP3), have thecapability of playing an MP3 CD-Ror CD-RW disc.

The radio can also play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3 files. When a disc

contains both types of audio, the CDplayer reads all MP3 files first, thenthe uncompressed CD audio files.

Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 50 playlists.. Up to 255 files.. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl

extension.. Files with an .mp3 or .cda file

extension.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a disc display asF1 ROOT.



Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.

Playlists

Discs that have playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,there is no playlist editing capabilityusing the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When playback starts from a newfolder, the new track name displaysunless folder mode has beenchosen as the default display, thenthe new folder name displays.

Buttons and Knobs


f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 fileson the disc.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the trackdisplays. Releases REV toresume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reduced



volume and the elapsed time of thetrack displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information): Press to displayavailable additional informationabout the current track.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile an MP3 disc is playing. TheMP3 disc remains inside the CDplayer.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay an MP3 disc while listening tothe radio or a portable audio device.Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches foran auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, NoAux Input Device Found maydisplay.

Softkeys



Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): MP3 files can belistened to on a CD in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom:

1. Press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random CurrentDisc displays to play songs fromthe current CD in random order.

2. Press the same softkey again toturn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to have the filesplayed in order by artist or album.The player scans the disc to sort thefiles by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc depending

on the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goes tothe next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the desired artistdisplays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.



3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the disc andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

CD Player Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error messagedisplays and/or the disc comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:. The CD player is very hot. When

the temperature returns tonormal, the disc should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, thedisc should play.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. A problem may have occurredwhile burning the disc.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the disc is not playing correctly forany other reason, try a knowngood disc.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack and aUSB port, located on the audiofaceplate. Some portable audio

devices such as iPods®, MP3players, and USB storage devicescan be connected to the vehicleusing a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable or aUSB cable.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑2 formore information on driverdistraction.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The radio system may have a3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right or left sideof the faceplate. This is not an audiooutput; do not plug the headphoneset into the front auxiliary input jack.An external audio device such as aniPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD changer, etc. can be connectedto the auxiliary input jack for use asanother audio source.



To use a portable audio player,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack. When adevice is connected, press the CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn to adjustthe volume. Additional volumeadjustments may have to be madefrom the portable device if thevolume is too quiet or not loud.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhile a portable audio device isconnected to the auxiliary input. Theportable audio device continuesplaying until it is stopped orturned off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toplay a CD while a portable audiodevice is connected to the auxiliaryinput. Press again and the systembegins playing audio from theconnected portable audio player.If a portable audio player is notconnected, No Aux Input Devicemay display.

Using the USB Port

The radio may have a USB portlocated on the lower right side of thefaceplate. Radios that have a USBport can play .mp3 and .wma filesthat are stored on a USB storagedevice as well as tracks that arestored on an iPod®.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to eight folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. Files are stored in the rootdirectory when the disc or storagedevice does not contain folders.Files accessed from the rootdirectory of a USB device displayas F1 ROOT.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

File Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe file extension as the track name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename is not displayed.



Preprogrammed Playlists

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first track inthe first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless the

folder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod

The radio buttons, knobs andsoftkeys are used to control a USBstorage device or an iPod when it isconnected to the USB port.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated on the front of the radio.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located on thefront of the radio. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works, “OKto disconnect” and a GM logo mayappear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the USB port if theingition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When the

ignition is turned OFF, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

Older iPod's that are not supportedcan still be used by connecting it tothe 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary inputjack using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable.

Using a USB Storage Deviceor iPod

The buttons and knobs on the radioand the softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

Buttons and Knobs


f (Tune): Turn to select files.

© SEEK: Press to go to the startof the track, if more than tenseconds have played. Press andhold © SEEK or press it multipletimes to continue moving backwardthrough tracks.



¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold ¨ SEEK orpress it multiple times to continuemoving forward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Softkeys


To use the softkeys, press a softkeybelow any tab that is displayed, or ifno tabs are displayed, press the firstor last softkey below the radiodisplay to display the tabs.


j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track. Thetab appears raised when pause isbeing used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder on theUSB drive.

To browse and select files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the desiredfolder. If there is more then onefolder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 untilthe desired folder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the desired fileto be played.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to view andselect a track on an iPod. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists



. Albums

. Genres

. Songs

. Composers

To select tracks:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select thedesired menu.

4. Turn f to scroll through thefolders or files in theselected menu.

5. Press f to select the track.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Press the softkey below>,2,C or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): Press thesoftkey below2 to turn shuffleoff. This is the default mode when aUSB storage device or iPod is firstconnected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Press the softkey below= orC to shuffle all songs onthe USB storage device or iPod.

C (Shuffle Album): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Press thesoftkey below> to shuffle allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing aPhone” in this section for moreinformation.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone with aHands Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.The range of the Bluetooth systemcan be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not allphones support all functions, andnot all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, to confirmsystem information, and to startspeech recognition.

x /c (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or to cancelan operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. See OnStar Overviewon page 14‑1 for more information.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.



2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPIN number. The PIN number isused in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturersuser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are useddelete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the system

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”




Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressx /c to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressx /c to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressx /c to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

To transfer a call with the audio inthe vehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”



Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturers user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through its cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on Deleting aPaired Phone and DeletingName Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. Recirculation

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Air Delivery Mode Control

F. Air Conditioning

G. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

Operation

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

When it is cold outside −18°C (0°F)or lower, use the engine coolantheater, if vehicle has one, to providewarmer air faster to the vehicle.An engine coolant heater warmsthe coolant the engine uses thatprovides heat to warm the inside ofthe vehicle. For more information,see Engine Heater on page 9‑18.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the fan speed.The fan must be on to run theair-conditioning compressor.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneland floor outlets. Some air will bedirected toward the side windows.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield and flooroutlets, with some air directed to theside windows. When this mode isselected, the system automaticallyturns off recirculation and runs theair-conditioning compressor unlessthe outside temperature is at orbelow freezing. The air-conditioningcompressor operates althoughthe indicator light is not on. Theair-conditioning indicator light turnsoff when defog is selected. If the

air-conditioning button is pressedwhile in defog mode, the indicatorlight will turn on. If the button ispressed again, the light will turn off.The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

1 (Defrost): This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield withsome air directed to the floor vents.In this mode, outside air is pulledinto the vehicle. The air-conditioningcompressor will not run unless theoutside temperature is at or belowfreezing. The air-conditioningcompressor operates although theindicator light is not on. Theair-conditioning indicator light turnsoff when defrost is selected. If theair-conditioning button is pressedwhile in defrost mode, the indicatorlight turns on. If the button ispressed again, the light turns off.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in the defrost mode.



To help clear the windshield quickly,do the following:

1. Select0.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow it is on.

The air-conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while it is idling orafter the engine is turned off isnormal.

Maximum Air Conditioning

On hot days, open the windows tolet hot inside air escape; then closethem. This helps reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the air conditioningsystem operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, dothe following:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select# air conditioning.

4. Select the?recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together forlong periods of time can cause theair inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in thevehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on. Air from outside thevehicle will circulate throughout thevehicle. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it

cannot be used with therecirculation mode. Press: tocancel the recirculation mode.

? (Recirculation): Press toturn the recirculation mode on. Anindicator light comes on to showthat it is on. This mode recirculatesand helps to quickly cool the airinside the vehicle. It can be usedto prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light blinksthree times if you try to userecirculation in a mode in which itcannot function.

Pressing this button cancels theoutside air mode. When switching tothe defog or defrost modes thesystem automatically moves fromrecirculation to outside air. Whenthe vehicle or fan is turned off andback on, the system defaults tooutside air automatically. Only userecirculation mode when it isneeded for comfort, since windowfogging can occur.



To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. To overridethis feature, select outside air.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog or frostfrom the rear window.

1 REAR: Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the rear window defogger is on.Be sure to clear as much snow fromthe rear window as possible.

If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),the rear window defogger turns offabout 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If turned on again, thedefogger only runs for aboutseven minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned offby turning off the engine.

If the vehicle's speed is maintainedabove 80 km/h (50 mph), the rearwindow defogger remains on oncethe button is pressed.

If the vehicle has heated outsidemirrors, the surface of the outsidemirrors heat when the rear windowdefogger is activated. See HeatedMirrors on page 2‑14.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you could cutor damage the warming grid, andthe repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal, or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with the remote startfeature, when it is activated theclimate control system heats orcools the inside of the vehicle usingthe modes that were set before thevehicle was turned off. The climatecontrol knobs will remain activeduring a remote start. However, theclimate control buttons will beinactive until the ignition is turnedon by the key. If the fan is off, theclimate control system will notoperate during remote start. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.



Automatic Climate Control SystemFor vehicles with this system, the heating, cooling, and ventilation can beautomatically controlled.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Conditioning

C. Recirculation

D. Outside Air

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Display

H. Temperature Control

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTOon both the fan speed control andthe air delivery mode control knobsto activate the automatic system.When automatic operation is activethe system controls the insidetemperature and air delivery.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Turn the fan knob and the modeknob to the AUTO position.

The current set temperaturedisplays. When AUTO isselected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet isautomatically controlled. The airconditioning compressor runswhile the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The airinlet will normally be set tooutside air. If it is hot outside,the air inlet may automaticallyswitch to recirculate inside air tohelp quickly cool down thevehicle.



2. Set the temperature.

An initial setting of 73°F (23°C)is recommended. Allow about20 minutes for the system toregulate. Pressw orx toadjust the temperature setting asnecessary. If the temperature isset at 60°F (15°C) the systemremains at the maximum coolingsetting. If the temperature isset at 90°F (32°C) the systemremains at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing eithermaximum setting does notcause the vehicle to heat orcool any faster.

Do not to cover the sensorlocated on the top of theinstrument panel near thewindshield. This sensorregulates air temperature basedon the intensity of the sun.

Also do not cover the sensorgrille on the lower right side ofthe climate control faceplate, asthis regulates the insidetemperature.

To avoid blowing cold air atengine start-up in cold weather,the system delays turning on thefan until warm air is available.The length of delay depends onthe engine coolant temperature.Turning the fan knob overridesthis delay and changes the fanto the selected speed.

Manual Operation

o (Off): Select this position on thefan knob to turn off the entireclimate control system. Outside airstill enters the vehicle. The airflowdirection and temperature can beadjusted.

x /w Temperature Control:Press the arrows to increase ordecrease the temperature inside thevehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the direction of the airflow inthe vehicle.

Select from the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets with some air directedto the side window outlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the floor and windshieldoutlets.

0 (Defrost): This mode clears thewindows of fog or frost more quickly.The system automatically controlsthe fan speed if defrost is selectedfrom the AUTO mode. If the outsidetemperature is 4°C (40°F) orwarmer, the air conditioningcompressor automatically runs tohelp dehumidify the air and dry the



windshield. The air conditioningindicator light blinks three times ifthe compressor is turned off while inthis mode.

# (Air Conditioning): Press turnthe air conditioning on and off. Anindicator light turns on to show theair conditioning is on.

When air conditioning is selected oris in AUTO mode, the system runsthe air conditioning automatically tocool and dehumidify the air enteringthe vehicle.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This reduces the time it takes forthe vehicle to cool down. Thenkeep the windows closed for theair conditioner to work its best.

On cool, but sunny days while usingmanual operation of the automaticsystem, use bi-level to deliver warmair to the floor and cooler air to theinstrument panel outlets. To warm orcool the air delivered, press thetemperature buttons to the desiredsetting.

In AUTO mode the system coolsand dehumidifies the air insidethe vehicle. Also while in AUTOmode, the system maximizes itsperformance by using recirculationas necessary.

Heating: On cold days when usingmanual operation of the automaticsystem, use floor mode to deliver airto the floor outlets. To warm or coolthe air delivered, pressx orw tothe desired temperature setting.

To use the automatic mode, turn theknob to AUTO and pressx orw toadjust the temperature.

: (Outside Air): Press to turnthe outside air mode on. Anindicator light comes on to show it ison. Air from outside the vehicle willcirculate throughout the vehicle. Theoutside air mode can be used withall modes, but it cannot be usedwith the recirculation mode.Pressing this button cancels therecirculation mode.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on. Anindicator light above the buttoncomes on to show it is on. Thismode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odorsfrom entering the vehicle. Therecirculation indicator light blinksthree times if you try to userecirculation in a mode in which itcannot function.

Pressing this button cancels theauto recirculation feature. Each timethe vehicle is started, the systemreverts to the auto recirculationfunction.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with the floor, defrost, or defogmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off to indicatethat this is not allowed. This is toprevent window fogging.



When the weather is cool or damp,operating the system in recirculationfor extended periods of time cancause fogging of the vehicle'swindows. To clear the fog, selecteither defog or defrost. Make surethe air conditioning is on. Allow theair conditioning to run automaticallyto help dehumidify the air.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. To overridethis feature, select outside air.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear): Press to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the rear window defogger is on.

If driving below 80 km/h (50 mph),the rear window defogger turns offabout 15 minutes after the button ispressed. If additional warming timeis needed, press the button again.

If the vehicle's speed is maintainedabove 80 km/h (50 mph), the rearwindow defogger remains on oncethe button is pressed.

For vehicles with heated outsidemirrors, the surface of the outsidemirrors will also heat when the rearwindow defogger is activated. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑14.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation

For vehicles with remote start, whenit is activated the climate controlsystem heats and cools the insideof the vehicle using the previoussystem settings before the vehiclewas turned off. The climate controlknobs will remain active during aremote start. However, the climatecontrol buttons will be inactive untilthe ignition is turned on by the key.If the fan is off, the climate controlsystem will not operate duringremote start.

With the automatic climate controlsystem, the climate control displays“RS” in place of the temperatureto indicate that remote start isactivated. For best performance,turn both the fan and mode knobs toAUTO. If the temperature is coldenough and the mode knob is set toAUTO, the system begins in defrostto clear the windows. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



Air VentsUse the lever located in the centerof each outlet by moving it either upand down or side-to-side, to changethe direction and amount of airflowin the vehicle.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Do not use non-GM approvedhood deflectors as they couldadversely affect the performanceof the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. When an objectionable odoroutside the vehicle isencountered, use therecirculation mode, with thetemperature knob at acomfortable setting to preventthe odor from entering thevehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpfulwhen driving through a longtunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of thismode in cold or cool weathercan cause window fogging.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-14Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-22Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-34Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-35Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-36Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones orother electronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑8.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.



. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious— or evenfatal— collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

If your vehicle has electric powersteering it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.



If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times untilit stops, or it is held until it isstopped for an extended time,power steering assist should returnshortly after a few normal steeringmovements.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑25.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Variable Effort Steering

Some vehicles have a steeringsystem that varies the amount ofeffort required to steer the vehicle inrelation to the speed of the vehicle.

The amount of steering effortrequired is less at slower speedsto make the vehicle moremaneuverable and easier to park.

At faster speeds, the steering effortincreases to provide a sport-like feelto the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

If the vehicle seems harder to steerthan normal when parking or drivingslowly, there may be a problem withthe system. You will still have powersteering, but steering will be stifferthan normal at slow speeds. Seeyour dealer for service.

Hydraulic Power Steering

If your vehicle has hydraulicpower steering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid on page 10‑19.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but may require increasedeffort. See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.



. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.



. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑38.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).



. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑25 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑9. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.



{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when you

feel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.



{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑58.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.

Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑79.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑38 andTire Pressure on page 10‑45.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,



the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑42for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight and

seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the driverside center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel tells the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel, and cargo.Never exceed the GVWR forthe vehicle, or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

And, if there is a heavy load,it should be spread out. See“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.



If you put things inside thevehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.



. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑42 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedalmust be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

9 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑18.

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission. Thekey can only be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.



If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, the vehicle needsservice.

ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets you use things like theradio and windshield wipers whilethe engine is not running.

R (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning lights. Theswitch will stay in this position whilethe engine is running. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position startsthe engine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to the ON/RUN positionfor driving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.



Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will slowdown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects

components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.



Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm‐up in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine coolant heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting the vehicle. An internalthermostat in the plug-end of thecord may exist which will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. With a 4 cylinderengine, the engine coolant

heater cord is located near theair cleaner box on the passengerside of the engine compartment.With a V6 engine, the enginecoolant heater cord is located onthe driver side around thebattery box. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for more informationon location.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine partsand prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Heated Seats (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition isturned to LOCK/OFF.



The power windows, heated seats,and sunroof will work until any dooris opened.

The radio continues to work until thedriver door is opened.

All these features operate when thekey is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑39.

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑26 formore information.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brake

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then,see if you can move the shift leveraway from P (Park) without firstpushing the button.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).



Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, see your dealer.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.



{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑19.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑39.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑19. If you are pulling atrailer, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑42.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock control



system. You must fully apply thebrake pedal then press the shiftlever button before you can shiftfrom P (Park) while the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever and push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑20.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑9.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

M (Manual Mode): This position,allows you to change gears similarto a manual transmission. If thevehicle has this feature, see DriverShift Control (DSC).

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) rearward toM (Manual).



While driving in manual mode,the transmission will remain inthe driver selected gear. Whencoming to a stop in the manualposition, the vehicle willautomatically shift into2 (Second) gear.

2. Press the + (plus) end of thebutton on the side of the shifterto upshift, or push the − (minus)end of the button to downshift.

The Driver Information Center (DIC)in the instrument cluster will changefrom the currently displayedmessage to the letter “M,” forManual position, and a numberindicating the requested gear.

While using the DSC feature thetransmission will have firmer shiftingand sportier performance. You canuse this for sport driving or whenclimbing hills to stay in gear longeror to downshift for more power orengine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm):. The transmission will not

automatically shift to the nexthigher gear if the vehicle speedor engine rpm is too low.

. The transmission will not allowshifting to the next lower gear ifthe vehicle speed or engine rpmis too high.

Second or Third Gear StartFeature

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into2 (Second) or 3 (Third) gear.A higher gear allows you to gainmore traction on slippery surfaces.

With the DSC feature, the vehiclecan be set to pull away in Second orThird gear.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) into theM (Manual Mode).

2. With the vehicle stopped,press (+) end of the button toselect 2 (Second) or 3 (Third)gear. The vehicle will start froma stop position in 2 (Second) or3 (Third) gear.

3. Once moving select the desireddrive gear.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,

there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, push downthe parking brake pedal with yourleft foot. If the ignition is on, thebrake system warning light willcome on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑17.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down withyour right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brakepedal with your left foot until you

feel the pedal release. If the parkingbrake is not released when youbegin to drive, the brake systemwarning light comes on and a chimesounds as a warning that theparking brake is still on.

The PUSH PARK PEDAL messagewill also display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) as areminder to release the parkingbrake. See Brake System Messageson page 5‑25.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑39.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle may have a TractionControl System (TCS) that limitswheel spin. This is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat the front wheels are spinningtoo much or are beginning to losetraction. When this happens, thesystem works the front brakes andreduces engine power by closingthe throttle and managing enginespark to limit wheel spin.

This light will flash when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen TCS begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. The cruisecontrol may be re-engaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑31.

When this light is on solid and eitherthe SERVICE TRACTION orTRACTION OFF message isdisplayed, the system will not limitwheel spin.

Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑26 for more information.

The Traction Control System isautomatically enabled whenever thevehicle is started. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery roadconditions, always leave the systemenabled. TCS can be turned off ifneeded.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑9.



To turn the system off or on, pressand release this button located onthe center console.

The traction off light comes on andthe DIC will display the appropriatemessage as described previouslywhen the button is pressed.

Traction Control Operation

Traction control limits wheel spin byreducing engine power to thewheels (engine speed management)and by applying brakes to eachindividual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started, and it will activateand flash the ESC/TCS light anddisplay the LOW TRACTIONmessage if it senses either of thefront wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction whiledriving. For more information on theLOW TRACTION message, seeRide Control System Messages onpage 5‑26.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleare allowed to spin excessivelywhile the ESC/TCS, ABS andBrake warning lights and theSERVICE ESC and/or SERVICETRACTION messages aredisplayed, the differential couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Reduce engine powerand do not spin the wheel(s)excessively while these lights andthis message are displayed.

Notice: When traction control isturned off, it is possible to losetraction. If you attempt to shift

with the front wheels spinningwith a loss of traction, it ispossible to cause damage to thetransmission. Do not attempt toshift when the front wheels do nothave traction. Damage caused bymisuse of the vehicle is notcovered. See your warranty bookfor additional information.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, areduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the system activates, theESC/TCS light will flash and thecruise control will automaticallydisengage. The cruise control maybe re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑31.



Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

Electronic StabilityControl (ESC)The vehicle has an ElectronicStability Control (ESC) systemwhich combines antilock brake,traction and stability control systemsand helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle inmost driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the ESC/TCS light will beon solid, and the ESC OFF orSERVICE ESC message will bedisplayed.

For more information, see RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑26.

This light will flash on the instrumentpanel cluster when the ESC systemis both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

When the light is on solid and eitherthe SERVICE ESC or ESC OFFmessage is displayed, the systemwill not assist the driver inmaintaining directional controlof the vehicle. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑26.

The Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is automaticallyenabled whenever the vehicle isstarted. To assist the driver withvehicle directional control,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, ESC can beturned off if needed.



If the vehicle is in cruise controlwhen the system begins to assistthe driver maintain directionalcontrol of the vehicle, the ESC/TCSlight will flash and the cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Thecruise control system may bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑31.

The ESC/TCS button is located onthe instrument panel.

The traction control system can beturned off or back on by pressingthe ESC/TCS button. To disableboth traction control and ESC, pressand hold the button briefly.

When the ESC system is turned off,the traction off light and the ESC offlight will be on to warn the driverthat both traction control and ESCare disabled. The TRACTION OFFand ESC OFF messages will appearon the DIC,

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑9.

ESC may also turn off automaticallyif it determines that a problem existswith the system. The ESC OFF andSERVICE ESC messages and theESC/TCS light will be on solid towarn the driver that ESC is disabledand requires service. If the problemdoes not clear after restarting thevehicle, see your dealer for service.See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑26 for more information.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.



Cruise ControlCruise control lets a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control andthe Traction Control System (TCS)or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑27 and ElectronicStability Control (ESC) onpage 9‑29. When road conditionsallow, the cruise control can be usedagain.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the steering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thecruise control system on and off.

RES+ (Resume): Press briefly tomake the vehicle resume apreviously set speed or press andhold to accelerate.

SET− (Set): Press to set the speedand activate cruise control or makethe vehicle decelerate.



Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. PressI to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on thebutton comes on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− and release it.The cruise symbol displays inthe instrument panel cluster toshow the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. The cruisesymbol in the instrument panelcluster also goes out indicatingcruise is no longer engaged. Oncethe vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the RES+button on the steering wheel. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the RES+ button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the RES+button briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET− on the

steering wheel until the lowerspeed desired is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET− button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise control speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle at a lower speed. When thebrakes are applied this ends thecruise control.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage the cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.. To turn off cruise control, press

theI button.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory, by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).



See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑34.

Recommended FuelIf the vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code 1) or the 2.4L L4 engine(VIN Code U), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octane ratingof 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heard whendriving. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine(VIN Code 7), use regular unleadedgasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. For bestperformance or trailer towing, you

could choose to use middle grade89 octane unleaded gasoline. If theoctane rating is less than 87, anaudible knocking noise, commonlyreferred to as spark knock, might beheard when driving. If this occurs,use a gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑35 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area.

We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.



Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑34.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuels

website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures that donot meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If youdo switch fuels, it is recommendedthat you add as much fuel aspossible — do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediately

after refueling for at least 11 km(7 mi) to allow the vehicle toadapt to the change in ethanolconcentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑37.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The fuel cap is behind the fuel dooron the vehicle's passenger side.To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

Turn the tethered fuel capcounterclockwise to remove. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability,the fuel cap will be yellow and statethat E85 or gasoline can be used.See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑36. While refueling, hang thetethered fuel cap from the hook onthe fuel door. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the Malfunction Indicator Lampcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank andwait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑82.



{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑79. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

vehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑80.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing onpage 9‑42. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy. Withthe added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.



Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.



Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantboils at a lower temperature than atnormal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑17.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important in

trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑17.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.



Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, andcargo in the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,

the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information.

The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10–15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).



After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑21.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑28 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑28.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-12Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-17Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-19Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-23Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (LS and LT) . . . . 10-26

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps (LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-29Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-39Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51


10-2 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-75

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-79Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑28.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑16.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑28.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑13.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It islocated inside the vehicle to theleft of the steering column.

2. Then go to the front of thevehicle and push the secondaryhood release handle toward thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood.

4. After the hood is slightly lifted, itwill continue to open to the fullposition. Before closing thehood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Lower the hooduntil the lifting force of the strutis reduced, then release thehood to latch fully. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine


10-6 Vehicle Care

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

B. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑13.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑14.

F. Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑13.

G. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑20.

H. Battery on page 10‑22.

I. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑19.

J. See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑31.


Vehicle Care 10-7

3.6 L V6 Engine


10-8 Vehicle Care

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑19.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑13.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑14.

G. Pressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑13.

H. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑20.

I. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

J. See Battery on page 10‑22.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑31.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑19.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑5 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutesfor the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

L4 Engine

V6 Engine

If the oil is below the MIN(minimum) mark for the L4 engine orbelow the cross‐hatched area at thetip of the dipstick for the V6 engine,add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the upper mark thatshows the proper operatingrange, the engine could bedamaged. You should drain outthe excess oil or limit driving ofthe vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in engine

damage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check withyour dealer or service provideron whether the oil is approved tothe dexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOONmessage comes on. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑25. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil changeis not necessary for up to a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and hold the DIC INFOand reset buttons, on the leftside of the steering wheel, at thesame time to enter thepersonalization menu. The OILLIFE RESET message displays.See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑22 and EngineOil Messages on page 5‑25.

3. Press and hold the reset buttonuntil the DIC display showsACKNOWLEDGED.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

The system is reset when theCHANGE OIL SOON messageis off.


10-12 Vehicle Care

If the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage comes back on whenthe vehicle is started, the engineoil life system has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always use

the automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑11.

For the 2.4 L and 3.6 L engines, thetransmission fluid will not reach theend of the dipstick unless thetransmission is at operatingtemperature. If the transmission fluidlevel needs to be checked, pleasetake the vehicle to the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Remove the spring clamps thathold the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.


Vehicle Care 10-13

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly using thealignment tab.

5. Install the cover by guiding thetabs on the rim of the top coverinto the bottom hinges and turnthe cover down to close it.

6. The spring clips will engageeasily, if the cover is properlyseated.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

3.6 L V6 Engine Shown, 2.4 L L4Engine Similar

A. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank

C. Pressure Cap


10-14 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑17.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before this isdone. See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑17 for more information.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark on thecoolant surge tank. If it is not, theremay be a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.


10-16 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant surge tank.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longerhot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise abouttwo or two and one-half turns.

If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. This will allow anypressure still left to be ventedout the discharge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tankwith the proper mixture, to theFULL COLD mark. Wait aboutfive minutes, then check to see ifthe level is below the mark. If thelevel is below the FULL COLDmark, add additional coolant tobring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until thelevel remains constant at theFULL COLD mark for at leastfive minutes.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fans.


Vehicle Care 10-17

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmight be lower. If the level islower than the FULL COLDmark, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge as well as anengine coolant temperature warninglight on the vehicle's instrumentpanel cluster. See Engine Coolant

Temperature Gauge on page 5‑19and Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light on page 5‑19.

If it is decided not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

If it is decided to lift the hood, makesure the vehicle is parked on a levelsurface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.


10-18 Vehicle Care

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergency

situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, a significant loss in powerand engine performance will benoticed. The temperature gauge willindicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (mi)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should beavoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑8.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

Power steering fluid is used in allvehicles with the V6 engine.Vehicles with the 4-cylinder enginehave electric power steering and donot use power steering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unless aleak is suspected in the system,or an unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspectedand repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN (Minimum) and MAX(Maximum) marks when the engineis cold, and at the MAX mark whenthe engine is hot. If the fluid is at theMIN mark when the engine is coldor hot, power steering fluid shouldbe added.

The fluid level should be within thecrosshatch area on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD orMIN mark on the dipstick, add justenough fluid to bring the level withinthe crosshatch area.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a LOW WASHERFLUID message displays on the


10-20 Vehicle Care

Driver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑22 for more information.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and other

parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.

If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes— for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.


10-22 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑17.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑26.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


10-24 Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

It is a good idea to clean or replacethe wiper blade assembly on aregular basis or when worn. Forproper windshield wiper bladelength and type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑12.

Notice: Allowing the wiper arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not be


Vehicle Care 10-25

covered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.

To replace the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to a dealer forservice.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑30.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps(LS and LT)

A. Back‐up Lamp

B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9 for more information.

2. Remove the two rearconvenience net hooks holdingthe trunk trim and move the trimaside.

3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),which hold the taillampassembly, from inside the trunk.

4. Remove the taillamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-27

5. Turn the bulb socket (B)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (A).

6. Pull the bulb from the socket (B).

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 toreinstall the taillampassembly (A).

Taillamps, Turn Signal,and Stoplamps (LTZ)

A. Back‐up Lamp

B. Stoplamp, Taillamp and TurnSignal Lamp


2. Remove the two rearconvenience net hooks holdingthe trunk trim and move the trimaside.


10-28 Vehicle Care

3. Remove the three wing nuts (A),which hold the taillampassembly, from inside the trunk.

4. Remove the taillamp assembly.

5. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector (C) from the LED (B).

6. Turn the LED (B)counterclockwise to remove it.

7. Install a new LED (B).

8. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 toreinstall the taillampassembly (A).

Back-Up Lamps



Vehicle Care 10-29

2. Remove the push pins holdingthe trunk trim (B).

3. Move the trim aside far enoughto gain access to the bulbassembly (A).

4. Turn the bulb socket (B)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb (A) from thesocket (B).

6. Install the new bulb.

7. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall.

License Plate LampTo replace the license platelamp bulb:

1. Remove the license plate bezelassembly by turning the twoscrews counterclockwise.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp assembly forward throughthe fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.


10-30 Vehicle Care

4. Push the new bulb in and turn itclockwise to install.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 921

License Plate Lamp 168

Rear Turn SignalLamp/Taillamp(LS and LT)

3157K LL

Rear LED TurnSignal Lamp/Taillamp (LTZ)

GM P/N25874489

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact the dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-31

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑31, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑34, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑36.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of theengine compartment, near thebattery.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-32 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioner Clutch

2Electronic ThrottleControl

3 Not Used

Fuses Usage

4Transmission ControlModule Ignition 1

5Mass AirflowSensor (LY7)

6 Emission

Fuses Usage

7 Left HeadlampLow-Beam

8 Horn

9Right HeadlampLow-Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps

11Left HeadlampHigh-Beam

12Right HeadlampHigh-Beam

13Engine ControlModule BATT

14 Windshield Wiper

15Antilock BrakeSystem (IGN 1)

16Engine ControlModule IGN 1

17 Cooling Fan 1

18 Cooling Fan 2


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Usage

19Run Relay, Heating,Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

20Body ControlModule 1

21Body Control ModuleRun/Crank

22Rear ElectricalCenter 1

23Rear ElectricalCenter 2

24 Antilock BrakeSystem

25Body ControlModule 2

26 Starter

41Electric PowerSteering

42Transmission ControlModule Battery

Fuses Usage

43

Ignition Module(LE9 & LE5);Injectors, IgnitionCoils Odd (LY7)

44Injectors (LE9 & LE5);Injectors, IgnitionCoils Even (LY7)

45Post Cat 02 SensorHeaters (LY7)

46Daytime RunningLamps

47 Center High-MountedStoplamp

50 Driver Power Window

51 Not Used

52 AIR Solenoid

54Regulated VoltageControl

55 DC/AC Inverter

56Antilock BrakeSystem BATT

Relays Usage

28 Cooling Fan 1

29Cooling Fan Series/Parallel

30 Cooling Fan 2

31 Starter

32 Run/Crank, Ignition

33 Powertrain

34Air ConditioningClutch

35 High Beam

36 Front Fog Lamps

37 Horn

38 Low-Beam Headlamp

39 Windshield Wiper 1

40 Windshield Wiper 2

48Daytime RunningLamps

49 Stoplamps

53 AIR Solenoid


10-34 Vehicle Care

Diodes Usage

27 Wiper

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the instrument panelnear the floor on the passenger sideof the vehicle.

Remove the panel cover to accessthe fuse block, then remove the fuseblock cover to access the fuses.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

POWERMIRRORS

Power Mirrors

EPSElectronic PowerSteering

Fuses Usage

RUN/CRANK

Cruise ControlSwitch, PassengerAirbag StatusIndicator


Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage

HVACBLOWERHIGH

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningBlower - High SpeedRelay

CLUSTER /THEFT

Instrument PanelCluster, TheftDeterrent System

ONSTAROnStar®

(If Equipped)

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

AIRBAG(IGN)

Airbag (Ignition)

HVACCTRL(BATT)

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningControl DiagnosticLink Connector(Battery)

PEDAL Not Used

WIPER SWWindshield Wiper/Washer Switch

IGNSENSOR

Ignition Switch

Fuses Usage

STRG WHLILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

RADIO Audio System

INTERIORLIGHTS

Interior Lamps

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

POWERWINDOWS

Power Windows

HVACCTRL (IGN)

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningControl (Ignition)

HVACBLOWER

Heating VentilationAir ConditioningBlower Switch

DOORLOCK

Door Locks

ROOF/HEAT SEAT

Sunroof,Heated Seat

Fuses Usage

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

NOTINSTALLED

Not Used

AIRBAG(BATT)

Airbag (Battery)

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

SPAREFUSEHOLDER

Spare Fuse Holder

FUSEPULLER Fuse Puller


10-36 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block islocated in the trunk of the vehicle.Access the fuse block through thetrunk panel on the driver side of therear cargo area.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1Passenger SeatControls

2 Driver Seat Controls

3 Not Used

Fuses Usage

4 Not Used

5Emission 2, CanisterVent Solenoid

6Park Lamps,Instrument PanelDimming


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fuses Usage

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

9 Not Used

10 Sunroof Controls

11 Not Used

12 Not Used

13 Audio Amplifier

14 Heated Seat Controls

15 Not Used

16

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System, XM™Satellite Radio(If Equipped)

17 Back-up Lamps

18 Not Used

Fuses Usage

19 Not Used

20Auxiliary PowerOutlets

21 Not Used

22 Trunk Release

23 Rear Defog

24 Heated Mirrors

25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage

26Rear WindowDefogger

27 Park Lamps

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Not Used

Relays Usage

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Not Used

35 Not Used

36 Trunk Release

37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp


10-38 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑46 for inflation pressureadjustment for high-speeddriving.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice covered roads isexpected. All season tires providegood overall performance on mostsurfaces, but they may not offerthe traction or the same level ofperformance as winter tires on snowor ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased roadnoise, and shorter tread life. Afterchanging to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling andbraking.

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availability andproper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑53.

If using snow tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P225/50R18or P225/50R17 size tires, theyare classified as low‐profileperformance tires. These tiresare designed for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement,however, may produce moreroad noise and tend to wearfaster.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contactwith road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performance

criteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑55.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


Vehicle Care 10-41

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a

regular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑75 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑58.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each squareinch of the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑45.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑45 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑52.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a


Vehicle Care 10-45

tire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑55.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size and

recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct coldtire inflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and Loading


10-46 Vehicle Care

Information label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). Foradditional information regardingthe compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑75.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to241 kPa (35 psi) for the front andrear tires, when operating thevehicle at high-speeds. Return thetires to the recommended cold tireinflation pressure when high-speeddriving has ended. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10 and TirePressure on page 10‑45.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more


10-48 Vehicle Care

tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑48 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors are

mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS turns on thelow tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and the

DIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Tire Messages onpage 5‑28.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑45.


Vehicle Care 10-49

The TPMS system can warn abouta low tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑51, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑51 and Tires onpage 10‑38.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑60 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑53.


10-50 Vehicle Care

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching processshould also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,

using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press and hold the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE)transmitter's LOCK andUNLOCK buttons, at the sametime, for about five seconds tostart the TPMS learn mode. Thehorn sounds twice indicating theTPMS receiver is ready and inlearn mode.

4. Start with the driver side fronttire. The driver side front turnsignal also comes on to indicatethat corner's sensor is ready tobe learned.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. The passenger side front turnsignal comes on to indicate thatcorner sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to thepassenger side front tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. The passenger side rear turnsignal comes on to indicate thatcorner sensor is ready to belearned. Proceed to thepassenger side rear tire andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.


Vehicle Care 10-51

8. The driver side rear turn signalcomes on to indicate that cornersensor is ready to be learned.Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5.

9. After hearing the single hornchirp for the driver side rear tire,two additional horn chirps soundto indicate the tire learningprocess is done. Turn theignition switch to LOCK/OFF.

If no tires are learned afterentering the TPMS learn mode,or if communication with thereceiver stops, or if the time limithas expired, turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF and startover beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑52 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑57.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑45and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑48.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑51 and TireRotation on page 10‑51 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure

maintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification (TPCSpec) system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the sameTPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number


10-54 Vehicle Care

will be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑39 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑51and Tire Rotation on page 10‑51for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑47.


Vehicle Care 10-55

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑53 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary


10-56 Vehicle Care

use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test

course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and


Vehicle Care 10-57

A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑58 for more information.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, drive slowand readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑38. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.


Vehicle Care 10-59

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.


10-60 Vehicle Care

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑66. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑60.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑21.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.


Vehicle Care 10-61

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

A. On/Off Button

B. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air orAir Only)

C. Pressure Relief Button

D. Pressure Gauge

E. Air Only Hose (Black)

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe compressor.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.


10-62 Vehicle Care

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑58 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑66.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)clockwise to the Sealant + Airposition.

9. Press the on/off (A) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (D) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure will


Vehicle Care 10-63

quickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑45.

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug from

the accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

11. Press the on/off button (A) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire;therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Return the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (G) back intheir original locations.

16. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister and place it ina highly visible location. Do notexceed the speed on this labeluntil the damaged tire isrepaired or replaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.


10-64 Vehicle Care

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico)on page 13‑9.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, use thecompressor kit to inflate the tireto the recommended inflationpressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑58 for other importantsafety warnings.


Vehicle Care 10-65

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑66.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (E) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (G) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (B)counterclockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (A) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (D). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑45.

The pressure gauge (D) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor off

to get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached. If the tire is inflatedhigher than the recommendedpressure, press the pressurerelief button (C), if equipped,until the proper pressurereading is reached. This optionis only functional when usingthe air only hose (E).

11. Press the on/off button (A) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (G) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (E) from the tirevalve stem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.


10-66 Vehicle Care

14. Return the air only hose (E)and the power plug (G) back totheir original locations.

15. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Remove the plastic cover.

2. Unscrew the connector (B) fromthe canister (A).

3. Pull up on the canister (A) toremove it.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

6. Screw the connector (B) to thecanister (A).

7. Slide the plastic cover back on.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑9.

2. Lift the cover.

3. Turn the retainer clockwise andremove the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment you will need is inthe trunk.



Vehicle Care 10-67

2. Remove the spare tire cover.

3. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise and remove it.Then remove the compact sparetire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑75 for more information.

4. Remove the wing nut holding thejack in place.

5. Remove the jack and wheelwrench from the trunk.

Tire Changing Tools

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack

The tools you will be using includethe wheel wrench (A) and jack (B).

1. Turn the wing nutcounterclockwise to loosenwheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench fromthe jack.


10-68 Vehicle Care

3. Extend the handle on the wheelwrench by pressing the buttonand pulling on the end of thewrench. You must do this beforeusing the wheel wrench.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑58.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel coveror hubcap that has plastic wheelnut caps, loosen the plastic nutcaps. You might need to use thewheel wrench to loosen them.Do not pry off wheel covers orcenter caps that have plasticwheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover orcenter cap from the wheel tolocate the wheel nuts.

If the vehicle has a wheel coveror hubcap without plastic wheelnut caps, gently pry on the edgeof the plastic wheel trim toremove it from the wheel tolocate the wheel nuts.

4. Use the wrench to loosen all thewheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.


Vehicle Care 10-69

5. Position the lift head at the jacklocation nearest the flat tire.Make sure all of the jack lifthead is touching the jackingflange under the body. Do notplace the jack under a bodypanel.

6. Put the compact spare tire nearthe flat tire.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thewrench clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the compact spare tire to fit.


10-70 Vehicle Care

8. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces and spare wheel.

11. Install the compact spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.


Vehicle Care 10-71

12. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end towardthe wheel. Tighten each nut byhand or with the wrench untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

13. Lower the vehicle by turningthe wrench counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown, with the wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Do not try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare tire. It will not fit.Store the wheel cover and wheelnut caps in the trunk until you havethe flat tire repaired or replaced.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat Tire and Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire and jack in thecompact spare tire compartment:


2. Remove the bolt extension (inthe yellow sleeve) from the jackand remove the center cap fromthe wheel.

3. Collapse the wrench using thesame button used to extend it.

4. Attach the wrench to the jack byplacing the tab on the wrenchinto the hole on the side of thejack. Then place the wrenchhandle over the tab on the sideof the jack.

5. Raise the jack to the heightshown and lock the wrench ontothe jack.


Vehicle Care 10-73

6. Place the jack over the bolt (A)on the floor, making sure itcontacts the bolt. Thread thejack retainer nut until it contactsthe jack.

7. With the valve stem up, placethe tire on the compartment floorwith the rear of the tire under thetrim panel. The tire may not laycompletely flat.

8. Line up the bolt with the wheelcenter.

9. With the yellow cap in place toprevent the wheel from beingscratched, screw the boltextension onto the bolt throughthe wheel center hole.

10. Remove the yellow cap fromthe bolt extension.

11. Secure the tire and wheel withthe larger wing nut.

A. Cover

B. Wing Nut

C. Extension

D. Flat Tire (valve stem up)

E. Nut

F. Jack

G. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑75.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Storing the Spare Tire andTools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


2. Collapse the wrench using thesame button used to extend it.

3. Attach the wrench to the jack byplacing the tab on the wrenchinto the hole on the side of thejack. Then place the wrenchhandle over the tab on the sideof the jack.

4. Raise the jack to the heightshown and lock the wrench ontothe jack.

5. Place the jack in the spare tirewell. Make sure the stow boltgoes through the hole in thecenter of the wrench on the jack,with the base of the jack towardsthe front of the vehicle. Turn thejack retainer nut until it firmlycontacts the wrench. Do notover tighten.


Vehicle Care 10-75

6. Place the compact spare into thetire compartment with the stowbolt going through the centerhole of the wheel.

7. Turn the spare tire retainer nutuntil it firmly contacts the wheel.Do not over tighten.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new, however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑22.

If the battery has run down, youmay want to use another vehicleand some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use thefollowing steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlet. Turn off the radio


Vehicle Care 10-77

and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thebatteries. Find the positive (+)and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. Yourvehicle's positive (+) terminaland negative (–) terminal arelocated under a black cover onthe battery. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑5 for more informationon location. Remove the coverto access the positive (+) andnegative (–) terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some things you shouldknow. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away from thedead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the caps over thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminals to their originalpositions.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What's the towing capacity of the

towing vehicle? Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far will the vehicle betowed? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Does the vehicle have theproper towing equipment?See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

When dinghy towing, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning ofeach day and at each RV fuel stopfor about five minutes. This willensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission to P (Park)and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.



Vehicle Care 10-81

4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove thefollowing fuse from theinstrument panel fuse block:(IGN SENSOR). See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 10‑34for more information.

5. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

6. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).


Remember to reinstall the IGNSENSOR fuse once the destinationhas been reached.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly:

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever inP (Park).


10-82 Vehicle Care


4. Remove the key from theignition.

5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.


Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washers

exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.


Vehicle Care 10-83

If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑11.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,

cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless the

components are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces after


Vehicle Care 10-87

cleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.


10-88 Vehicle Care

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two hooks.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat toremove it from the hooks.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the openings in the floor matover the hooks and push it downinto position.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-13

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipmentfor fast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑34.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑51.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑19.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑51.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑11.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑14.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑19.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑82. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑24.



. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑45.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑51.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑12.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑82.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑16.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑82.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑23.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑23.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑24.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑24.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑60.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑18.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑13.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑13.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricatechassis components every5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑11 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.

With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.



. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑85 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑82.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑14.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(if equipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.6L V6 Engine 12600224 PF48

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12625058 41-103

3.6L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 25800624 —

Passenger Side – 53.0 cm (21.0 in) 25800623 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.1 L 7.5 qt

3.6L V6 Engines 9.4 L 9.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank 61.7 L 16.3 gal

Transmission Fluid*

2.4L L4 Engine with 6— Speed Automatic Transmission(RPOMH8)— (Drain and Refill)

5.0 L 5.3 qt

3.6L V6 Engine with 6— Speed Automatic Transmission(RPOMH2)— (Drain and Refill)

6.0 L 6.3 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑12 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine U Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

2.4L L4 Engine 0 Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 1.10 mm (0.044 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Vehicle Data Recording . . . . 13-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.



However, we recognize that despitethe good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Chevrolet encourages customersto call the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0811

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0811

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8190

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.) atchevrolet.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyChevrolet/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.

. Storage for online service andmaintenance records.

. Chevrolet dealer locator forservice nationwide.

. Exclusive privileges and offers.

. Recall notices for your specificvehicle.

. OnStar and GM CardmemberServices Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

Chevrolet Owner Centre(Canada) chevroletowner.ca

Take a trip to the Chevrolet OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the Chevrolet -recommended maintenanceservices for your vehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.

. Location of the vehicle.

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific to CanadianPurchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.



. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in thefollowing pages. Programcoverage varies by country.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0800.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedChevrolet dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.



. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Chevroletdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, RoadsideAssistance will not provide

service. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Chevrolet dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.

. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestChevrolet dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stay atthe dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistancewill coordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.



A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destinationor return to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.

Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.



. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Chevrolet dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance servicesare of no cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which arelisted previously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0800

United States

1-866-466-8901

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Chevrolet reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by

original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,



insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle



Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation for

damage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.

Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).



. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑22.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.



In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Vehicle Data RecordingThis vehicle may be equipped with amodule that records data in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as when an air bag deploys orthe vehicle hits a road obstacle.This data could help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. Some data may berelated to the vehicle dynamics andsafety systems operation. The datamay show:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. If and how far the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data could provide anunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.Data could be recorded by thevehicle only if a non-trivial crashsituation occurs; no data arerecorded under normal drivingconditions and no personal data arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine recorded data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read recorded data, specialequipment is required, and accessto the vehicle or the module isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the module.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle has OnStar® and anactive subscription to the OnStar®services, refer to the OnStar®Terms and Conditions forinformation on data collection anduse. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.


14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinations canalso be forwarded to the vehiclefrom Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com to their

Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar mobile app. Seewww.onstar.com for coverage maps.


14-4 OnStar

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device,an OnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle can beremote started, if equipped, or thedoors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca(Canada); contact OnStar at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; orpushQ to speak with an Advisor.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may not

work if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑20 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.


OnStar 14-7

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.


14-8 OnStar

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑45. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-12Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Airbag System (cont'd)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-13Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-24Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-17

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-14Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-29Taillamps, TurnSignal, andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 10-27

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-14CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-24

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 3-47Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-16

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data RecordingVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 9-29Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Engine (cont'd)Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87


INDEX i-5

FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Front Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-34Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Requirements, California . . . . .9-34System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Delayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2


i-6 INDEX

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-5

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-46Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-26Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-39LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Lamps (cont'd)Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

LightElectronic Stability Control(ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Electronic Stability Control(ESC)/Traction ControlSystem (TCS) IndicatorWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

LightingEntry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


INDEX i-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-17Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-19

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Locks (cont'd)Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-11

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-26Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

OnStar® (cont'd)Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-24

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-18Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16


INDEX i-9

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 9-29Electronic Stability (ESC) . . . . .9-29Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21


i-10 INDEX

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4

Seats (cont'd)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-47

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-13Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-23Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2


INDEX i-11

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsTurn Signal andStoplamps . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 10-27

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-48Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Tires (cont'd)Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-39Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-39Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-80Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-27Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18


i-12 INDEX

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle (cont'd)Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-29Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-66

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . 13-19Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-24

2012 chevy malibu owner's manual baltimore, maryland

Automotive

vehicle features

vehicle care

chevrolet malibu owner

vehicle security

specific vehicle

vehicle identification

vehicle data12

vehicle messages